Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 263 . 265 . 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 412 . 415 . 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 525 . 536 . 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 668 . 668 . 671 . 674 . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 803 . 805 . 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the operation of the software is parametric. For most tutorial projects. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. In the Revit Architecture model. hence. the hierarchy of elements. review the Revit Architecture templates. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. quantities. and open Metric\Templates. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and plans. scope. 12 Select DefaultMetric. You learn the terminology. how to navigate the user interface. every drawing sheet. If you move the partition. you will use the default template. the parameter is one of association or connection. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. sections. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. If the length of the elevation is changed. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 13 Click OK. drawing sheets. drawings.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and residential. In this case.rte. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. click Training Files. and customize the project as necessary. and schedules required for a building project. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and click Open. As you work in drawing and schedule views. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. construction. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. schedules. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and phases when you need it. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. 2D and 3D view.

For example. For example. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. For example. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. programming is not required. They help to describe or document the model. doors. grids. windows. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. dimensions. walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example.When you change something. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. They display in relevant views of the model. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. levels. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. doors. and 2D detail components. If you can draw. dimensions. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and cabinets are model components. and keynotes are annotation elements. walls. filled regions. tags. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. windows. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and reference planes are datum elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Examples include detail lines. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and roofs are model elements. tags.

The project file contains all information for the building design. floors. However. section views. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. schedules. families. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. first floor. In other cases. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Project: In Revit Architecture. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. and drawings of the design. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. views of the project. for example. you can explicitly control them. you must be in a section or elevation view. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. By using a single project file. and ceilings. and types. Often. from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model. To place levels. and so forth). top of wall. such as roofs. for example. elevation views. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. or bottom of foundation. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you do nothing to establish these relationships. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction .In Revit Architecture. Most often. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls.

■ Type: Each family can have several types. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. ceilings. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. System families can be transferred between projects. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. In the steps that follow. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example. the user interface is labeled. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). identical use. making it easy to understand what each button represents. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. A type can be a specific size of a family. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. For example. For example. dimensions. specifically its clear user interface. However. and levels. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). System families include walls. A type can also be a style. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. categories of model elements include walls and beams. and similar graphical representation. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. floors. roofs. In the following illustration. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties.

In addition. click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. This creates a new project based on the default template. By default.

You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. For example. While working in the drawing area. which are listed on the menu. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. Edit. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. and View. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File.

The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . a door type is specified. when you add a door. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. For example. When you select the Door tool. On the left side of the Options Bar. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 9 In the Type Selector. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.

In the drawing area. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . immediately below the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. containing buttons grouped by function. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.

The respective commands display on the Design Bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab.11 Click OK. click the tab in the Design Bar. select Views (all). The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser.

sheets. double-click its name. windows). delete. reports. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. walls. schedules. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. families. 3D). Navigating the User Interface | 15 . scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. and groups. and rename views. and group name. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. To open a view. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. elevations. families. The browser is dockable. family category (doors.

You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. The cursor displays as a pencil. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. After creating a browser organization scheme. In the bottom left corner of the window. Do not click. click Cancel. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. In this case.

You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. There are several tools that help you find information. regarding selected elements in a view. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5.18 On the Design Bar. It highlights when the cursor is over it. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. Windows: From any window. Click the Help button. press F1 for context-sensitive help. After you are familiar with these tasks. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Toolbar: From the toolbar. press F1 for help. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. In the status bar. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. click Modify to end the Wall command. Tooltips: To see tooltips. in conjunction with tooltips. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. If no Help button displays. In addition. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. The status bar also provides information. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. 20 Press TAB. You can use this tri-pane. When you place the cursor over an element. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. click on the Standard toolbar. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. find a keyword on the Index tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 5 On the View toolbar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. the view zooms out from the building model. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. For example. In the following steps.rvt.

The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. When you release the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. To modify or add snap increments. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms in on the selected area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . As you move the mouse. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 10 To display SteeringWheels. . 12 Click and hold the mouse button. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. on the View toolbar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 7 Click in the drawing area.

You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and double-click 2nd Flr. referred to as shape handles. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . bottoms. When drawing or modifying a building model. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. expand Floor Plans. and select the wall. Cnst. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 15 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. For more information about SteeringWheels. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and click Help. These are the drag controls. press ESC. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. Small blue dots. display along the ends. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. moving the wheel to the desired location. Similar controls. as shown. 17 Type ZR. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. expand Views (all). called drag controls. and then using the Zoom tool again. and click the SteeringWheels tab.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.

and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. require 2 clicks to complete the command. you want to move the table closer to the wall.18 Click and drag the left control. click (Move). After selecting the element to move. for example. The table moves down. 23 Click next to the lower wall. In this case. as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. Some commands. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and on the Tools toolbar. click to specify the starting position. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. to lengthen the wall. such as Move and Copy. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 .

and click again to end it. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. and drag it on top of the table. 26 On the Undo menu. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . such as the Lines command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. click Lines. In this example. on the Standard toolbar. Some commands. select the second item in the list. or press CTRL+Z. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 24 Select the plant. Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).

Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.29 To end the command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

this tutorial uses imperial units only. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. In Revit Architecture. illustrating how building components work together. In this tutorial. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. detail. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. and annotate building assemblies. When you have finished these tutorials. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. or referenced as a drafting view. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. but for training purposes. 27 . Use detail components to define an assembly. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality.

click Training Files. for Name. create a reference callout. you will create a drafting view. If necessary.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. and reference a drafting view. scroll until the folder is displayed. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Drafting View. import a DWG detail. 2 In the Drafting View dialog.rvt. 3 In the Scale list. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. enter Window Head Detail. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

). 10 In the drawing area. displaying the extents of the detail. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. as shown. select Black and White. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. The model zooms out. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 9 Type ZR.In the Project Browser. located directly to the left of the drawing area. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. The drawing area is still blank. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.dwg. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . 6 In the Colors field list. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. and click Open. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area.

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. in the Type Selector. to activate the view selection list. and in the Scale list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.The view displays to the specified area. click Callout. 12 On the Options Bar. select Detail View: Detail. 14 In the drawing area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 13 Click Reference other view. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail.

select Callout. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Detail View: Detail. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. c_express_workshop_details_start.rvt. and in the Scale list. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.The reference callout is created. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. double-click the reference callout tag head. in the Type Selector. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . adjust the detail view display settings. 3 In the drawing area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”.

and click Rename. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 Right-click Detail 0. 6 In the drawing area. under Detail Views(Detail). for Name. and click OK. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. click Modify to clear the selection.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Detail). select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Wall Base 1. enter Wall Base 1.

Model-Based Detailing | 33 . This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. bordered by a solid line.

14 In the drawing area. for Display Model. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. click (Hide Crop Region). under Graphics. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 16 Click OK. and click View Properties. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. select As Underlay. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

20 In the drawing area. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. Stud. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 17 On the View Control Bar. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. type 1' 6''. and press ENTER. typical details can easily be placed. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. Directly above the drawing area.Brick on Mtl. If the crop region is enlarged. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 19 In the Type Selector. click Detail Components. By grouping detail components. on the Options Bar.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background.

add the following detail components as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. click Modify to end the command. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 23 Using the same method. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

28 Press ESC to end the command. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. or instructions within a construction documentation package.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. In the next exercise. c_express_workshop_details_start. for Full Path. in the type selector. and verify that Horizontal. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click Browse. 4 On the Options Bar. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project.rvt. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. map keynotes by material. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . For more information about customizing a keynote database. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. and under Keynote Table. click Training Files. click Keynote ➤ Element. special notes. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.txt. You can customize this list. and Free End are selected. and format keynote styles. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Leader.

Either move the text inside. 9 Press ESC to end the command. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.5 In the drawing area. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. If no value has been specified. a question mark displays. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 8 Click to place the tag.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. Keynoting | 39 .

16 In the drawing area. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 15 Select 07 21 00. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Material. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 13 Click to place the tag.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation.

All items within the selection display in red. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Click Check None. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Only the keynotes remain selected.Boxed. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 19 In the Type Selector. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Select Keynote Tags. legends. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number .

Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and modify and update the project sheet title block. In this exercise. In this lesson. Place views on drawing sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. Add labels to a title block. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. update the project information element properties. this tutorial uses imperial units only.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. but for training purposes. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.

If necessary. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. Project Sheet Layout | 43 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. click Training Files. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. In Revit Architecture. 3 Click OK.rvt. In the Project Browser. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. or in the element properties of the title block.

It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. hold down the wheel and drag. right-click A602 . drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. and click Rename. To zoom in and out. click Modify to clear the selection. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. double-click Checker. enter Sections/Details. 9 In the Project Browser. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. roll the wheel. 6 In the Title Block. To pan. Then. Smith and press ENTER.Unnamed. In this tutorial. enter A602. For Name. 7 Enter K. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 8 On the Design Bar. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. you can enter ZE to zoom out. Click OK. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 5 In the drawing area. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number.4 Type ZR. under Sheets(all).

in the Type Selector. enter 4/10/2008. 18 On the Options Bar. 13 Click OK. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. select the title block. select Text : 1/8''. Smith. enter Design Development. (Left) is selected. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Type ZR. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . 15 In the Options Bar. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter J. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Client Name. The Family Editor opens. For Project Name. For Project Status. 20 Click and type Project Status. click Text. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule.

46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Modify to exit the command. 29 On the Design Bar. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. select Label : 3/16''. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 22 Using the same method. add Project Issue Date parameter. 23 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. as shown. click Label. 26 In the Edit Label dialog.21 On the Design Bar. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. and click OK. as shown. click (Load into Project). to add 28 Using the same method. and click. under Category Parameters. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and verify that (Top) are selected.

enter Keynote Legend . for Full Path.30 In the Reload Family dialog. for Name. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . click Training Files. a viewport displays. click Browse. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. you will create. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. representing the view or schedule. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. place and modify a keynote legend. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Next you will create. and click Yes.Project. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.txt. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and under Keynote Table. In this exercise. to a drawing sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types.

expand Legends. under Sheets (all). The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. double-click A601 . 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.Sections/Details. and click OK. and drag Keynote Legend . as shown. under Text. on the Appearance tab.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser. clear Show Headers.

11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. The keynote legend is visible.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. click Edit. and click OK. at the bottom of the Filter tab. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. and click OK. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Detail). select Filter by sheet. under Legends. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. enter Keynote Legend . 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Filter. as shown. right-click Keynote Legend . for View Name. not keynotes.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown.Sheet. 19 Click OK twice. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.Project.

The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area.The keynote legend is automatically updated. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. The view title with line displays below the viewport. under Sheets (all). Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. as shown. double-click A0 . Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. The view remains selected. and then add and update a Drawing list.Title Sheet 1. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet.

expand Schedules/Quantities. or omit view titles from sheets. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 6 Type ZR. Revit Architecture displays a view title. define the information to include in a view title. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. by default. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 3 In the Type Selector. Press ESC to clear the selection. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. The drawing list remains selected. As part of a construction document set. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection.When you place a view on a sheet. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. as shown. and zoom in on the drawing list.

right-click the selected sheets. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated. while pressing SHIFT. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. select A602 . including only sheets that contain views. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and click OK. under Identity Data. clear Appears In Drawing List. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.Sections/Details and select A801 .Ceiling Plans. under Sheets (all).

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a curtain wall. For example. 57 . If the grid moves. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. As you develop the building design. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. it is good practice to test the constraints. a central service core.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them.

After the beginning exercises. notice four elevation markers. West. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. verify that the second option is selected. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. 5 Click OK. and customize the project as necessary. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. and settings. such as a door or window. click New. from the product library. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. but contains no geometry. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. you will use the default template. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. For this project. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. To create the project file. The new project opens. and click Browse. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. In views that display elevation markers. select Project. construction. Creating the Project In this exercise. In practice. you design inside the elevation markers. you use a template that is provided with the software. under Projects. South. and residential.rte. 3 Under Template file. East. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. The project is stored as a single file. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. levels. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Create new. click Training Files. views.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. you load any required family type that is not in your project. with an RVT extension. In the drawing area in the right pane. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file.

display in the south elevation. reflected ceiling plan views. notice the Legends. 8 Under Floor Plans. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. delete. You can add. and elevation views created in the project by the template. 13 In the file window. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. As you design and document your building model. and families in your project. created by the template. Sheets (all). The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. as well as change their names. 7 If necessary. double-click Metric. Two level lines. 14 For File name. duplicate them. locate the Project Browser. heights. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). or by opening the view in the Project Browser. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. expand Views (all). These views are customizable: you can rename them. such as schedules and legends. double-click South. Schedules/Quantities. Groups. NOTE If you create a project without a template. and duplicate levels. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. will be accessible from the Project Browser. sheets. and delete them. and other properties. change their properties. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. Ceiling Plans. schedules. then expand Floor Plans. enter Revit Retail Building. 10 In the Project Browser. Creating the Project | 59 . You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. the view you see in the drawing area.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Training Files. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Families. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). content and building model reports.

so that when one level moves. doors. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Project Levels on page 60. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. expand Views (all). 16 Click Save. verify that Project Files (*. You learn how the levels are locked. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. view the Save reminder interval. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. When you begin designing. you will want to save your work frequently. After you modify the two default levels. and double-click South. to each other. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. the other levels move and change with it. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 00 Foundation. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. You change the names of the 2 default levels. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line.rvt) is selected. and windows within the building model. and press ENTER.15 For Save as type. and on the General tab. or constrained. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. enter 0. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. and then move it up. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 13 On the Options Bar.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. enter -1800. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. and click Basics. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. click Level. 14 Click Plan View Types. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 5 In the Project Browser. right-click. If it does not. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. which should display by default. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. When you add the new level. and press ENTER. enter 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. This is the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels | 61 . Next. not all the tabs are visible. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. view the Design Bar. and click OK. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. By default.

Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. click Level. and enter 02 Level. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. or on the Design Bar. you add another level. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. 26 Press ESC. enter 3750.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Pick Lines). add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. (You do not have to click to specify the start point.As you move the cursor. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. 19 Click OK. right-click Level 3. If you create a level by copying it. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and move it slightly upward. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 25 Click to place the level line. 16 Enter 3750. click Modify to end the command. 23 On the Options Bar. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. click Rename. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. and press ESC. Next. using a different option. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. under Floor Plans. and for Offset. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and rename the corresponding views. click to specify the endpoint of the level line.

Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. all the levels move. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. as shown. Adding Project Levels | 63 . 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Notice that by moving the top level. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. the levels are no longer constrained. and you can move them independently.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. If you select a level and click its lock.

■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line. In a later exercise. select (Draw). the column height changes as well. so that if the roof elevation changes. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. On the Design Bar. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. When the grid is complete. Move the cursor up. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. In the following exercise. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 On the Options Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model.

and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Next. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Enter A. click Grid. click (Pick Lines). and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and press ENTER. enter 7500 mm. for Offset. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. enter 7500 mm. enter 4500 mm. On the Options Bar. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Click to place the grid line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. for Offset.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble.

66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. and specify the grid line endpoint. click Grid.8 Press ESC. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. On the Options Bar. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.

22 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select grid lines C and 3. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 15 Starting with grid line A. click Dimension. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 14 On the Options Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click (Aligned). 21 Press ESC twice. click Dimension.

The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. click Duplicate. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 29 In the Name dialog. click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. until it is closer to grid line 5. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Two pins display on the grid lines. click . 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line.5mm Bubble with Gap. 31 For End Segments Length. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click the value for Center Segment. 24 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. If necessary. 32 Click OK twice. At the left endpoint of the grid line. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. enter 6. and select None. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click Modify. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. and press ESC. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. and select grid line A. (Element Properties). 26 In the drawing area. select grid line 5. until it is closer to grid line A. enter 50mm. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . By pinning these central grid lines. The pins are hidden.

Creating a Column Grid | 69 . select Grid : 6. click Structural Column. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 39 In the Type Selector. 37 Select the grid lines again. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. select Grid : 6. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click (Grid Intersection). select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. click Modify. select all of the grid lines. For Place By. and press ESC. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish.5mm Bubble with Gap. 35 In the Type Selector. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. The original continuous grid lines are restored.5mm Bubble. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden.

click Activate Dimensions. 52 On the Options Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. If it is unlocked. select 01 Entry Level. click Camera. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. double-click 01 Entry Level. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. Next.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. under Floor Plans. 45 While pressing CTRL. lock it. and unlock it. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 43 Press ESC. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. select grid line A. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 46 On the Options Bar. 47 Enter 9000. for From. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. and click to place the target point of the camera.

You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. Adding Beams on page 72. In the Rename View dialog. and then copy them to subsequent levels. displays in bold under 3D Views. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. When you finish adding beams. expand 3D Views. Adding Beams In this exercise. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. and click Rename.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). The current view. named 3D View 1 by default. Right-click 3D View 1. enter To Building. and click OK.

2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. under Floor Plans. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . the icon on the right side of the scale. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 8 While pressing CTRL. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. click Finish. click Beam. 9 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. click (Create Beam On Grid). verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. double-click 01 Entry Level. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 73 . 4 Click Medium. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. The view is currently set to Coarse.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. select each grid line. The selected grid lines display as red. 7 On the Options Bar. double-click To Building to view all of the beams.

Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. press and hold SHIFT. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans. click Modify. click (Default 3D View). 12 On the View toolbar. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. right-click. and click Select All Instances. select 02 Level. 14 Select one of the beams. double-click 01 Entry Level. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select 06 Roof. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. and click OK. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

click 24 Press ESC. under Constraints. select 06 Roof. resize the view to see the entire structure. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. All of the columns display as red. right-click. under 3D Views. view the Top Level parameter. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 20 Click Cancel. for Top Level. and click Select All Instances. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK.to the 5th level. (Element Properties). and click Element Properties. under Instance Parameters. Adding Beams | 75 . You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. and if necessary. 21 With the column selected. double-click To Building. 06 Roof. right-click. 25 In the Project Browser. When you created the columns.

View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. double-click South. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. as lines only. but you want to display them in less detail. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. 28 Save the drawing. under Elevations. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.

Adding Braces on page 77. To better add the braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and press ESC to end the command. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. click Framing Elevation. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces | 77 . verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.29 Proceed to the next exercise.

8 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. and when the endpoint snap displays. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. After you add the final brace. click Brace. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. The associated framing elevation view displays. double-click the elevation marker arrow. but when placed the braces are placed. 11 Using the same technique. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click to specify the start point of the brace. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 7 On the Design Bar. press ESC twice. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them.

Adding Braces | 79 . IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. delete it and redraw it. The height of the roof lowers. enter 18000 mm. and press ENTER.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height.

14 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. and press ENTER. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .13 Double-click the 04 Level height. but this time add them from right to left. double-click 00 Foundation. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. enter 10000 mm.

double-click 00 Foundation. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. NOTE As you add braces. and press ENTER.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. enter 12000 mm. as shown in the 3D view below. click Activate Dimensions. 19 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces | 81 . and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 23 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. 21 Select grid line A.

double-click South. double-click 00 Foundation. Test connectivity of the columns. 29 In the Project Browser. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. lock it. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 26 In the Project Browser. 31 Save the drawing. and if necessary.24 In the Project Browser. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Creating a Foundation In this exercise. grid size. under Elevations. click and roof height. 28 On the Standard toolbar. Creating a Foundation on page 82. double-click {3D}. and drag it away from the structure. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. beams. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views.

and how to load specific families into a project. In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. The pile cap has been added in the view. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. under Extents. Click OK twice. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. In the View Range dialog. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. for Level. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you load the pile cap family. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Creating a Foundation | 83 . A warning displays. and drag it to the drawing area. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid.Before you can add the pile caps. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Edit. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. expand Families. and press ESC twice. under View Depth. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. and expand Structural Foundations. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. and click View Properties. select Unlimited. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. double-click 00 Foundation. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. The foundation pile cap now displays. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. for View Range. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. click Training Files.

under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. press ESC twice. and click Create Similar. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser.

beams. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. You load new column. under 3D Views.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. double-click {3D}. beam. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select one of the columns.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Select All Instances. All columns in the building model display as red. you change the types of the columns. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and brace families into the project. click Training Files. and braces that you used to create the building structure.

6X15. click Modify. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. This not the size that you want to use. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. for d. click (Default 3D View).3 In the Type Selector. The building model displays the round hollow columns. but it is the only size of its type currently available. enter 75mm. 13 In the Name dialog. right-click. 16 On the Design Bar. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. enter 75mm. 4 On the Design Bar.5CHS. and click OK twice. under Dimensions. 18 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties).2X101. click Edit/New. The brace type changes. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and changing its size parameter. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 15 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. you change the brace type. click Brace. and click OK. click Duplicate. 17 While pressing CTRL. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . the braces as well as the beams change. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. In the following steps. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. double-click Elevation 1-a. 9 In the Type Selector. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 6 In the Type Selector. and click Select All Instances. for Type.9. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.

Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. select m_RRB_structure_complete. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.rvt. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 3 Under Positioning. and click Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. After the files are linked. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. select Auto .

double-click South. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar.4 In the Project Browser. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and walls could also be copy/monitored. After the link is established. and click Select Link. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 8 On the Options Bar. however. In this case. click Copy. select Levels 00 through 06. 5 On the Tools toolbar. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. click (Copy/Monitor). you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. depending on the project. under Elevations. 9 In the drawing area. select Multiple. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. structural members. select the linked Revit model. Grids. while pressing CTRL. 6 In the drawing area.

under Floor Plans. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view.10 On the Options Bar. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . right-click Level 1. First. for Floor Plan views. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Using the same method. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. click Finish. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 16 Click OK. 15 In the New Plan dialog. delete the Level 2 floor plan. click OK. click Finish mode. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. while pressing SHIFT. and click Delete. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. enter Floor Plans. right-click. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 21 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. right-click. double-click 01 Entry Level. 24 In the New View Template dialog. select the Topography : Surface.19 In the Project Browser. click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. for Name.

Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. click Camera.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Names. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 34 In the 3D view that displays. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. select Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. To create floors. Adding Floors on page 92. Some other Revit Architecture elements. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. stairs. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. In this exercise. right-click 3D View 1. click Training Files. 36 In the Rename View dialog. Adding Floors In this exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. such as roofs. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. enter To Building. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects.rvt. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. expand 3D Views. and railings are also created from sketches.35 In the Project Browser. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK.

On the Options Bar. click Dimension. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. past the first vertical grid line. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. Move the cursor to the left. double-click 01 Entry Level. Leave this dimension unlocked. At the top left corner of the grid. under Floor Plans. click Floor. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. If the grid changes size. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. and elements in the current view display as gray.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 93 . select the top floor line. You are now in the Sketch Editor. and then the first horizontal grid line. click Lines. On the Sketch tab. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. Do not lock the dimension. click (Rectangle).

94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. They display on the floor sketch. and change their values to 300 mm. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then press ESC. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. select the top floor line. Select and lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimensions. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. click Modify. press ENTER. and click the temporary dimension value. Enter 300. At the top left corner of the grid.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Move the cursor to the left dimension.

9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. and press ESC. On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and lock the dimensions. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. double-click 02 Level. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it.8 Select the floor. under Floor Plans. click Quit Sketch. using a different sketching technique. on the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click Lines. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Adding Floors | 95 . click Floor. click (Pick Lines). Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. On the Sketch tab. and on the Options Bar. Select the three remaining floor lines. enter 1500mm. Next. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. click Edit.

The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. under Floor Plans. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click Floor. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. and a lock icon displays. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 17 On the Sketch tab. The 02 Level floor displays. click (Align). Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 16 On the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Lines. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. double-click 03 Level.

View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Alternatively. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Views ➤ 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. Adding Floors | 97 . and on the Options Bar. click Edit.24 On the Design Bar. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click 01 Entry Level. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 32 Select the floor. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and lock the edges. 31 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. under Floor Plans. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 35 On the Sketch tab. select 05 Roof Garden.

3 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. double-click 06 Roof. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click to place the roof line. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. To create the roof.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ ■ For Offset. enter 1800 mm. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. When a blue dashed line displays. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. click Lines. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Adding a Roof on page 98. Click (Pick Lines). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Roof In this exercise. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.rvt. click Training Files. and press ENTER.

9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). Adding a Roof | 99 . 7 On the Options Bar. for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and when the blue dashed line displays.6 Select grid line 5. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). enter 300 mm. click to place the roof line.

■ 12 On the Design Bar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. select the roof.10 Press ESC. click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend). Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.

click Section. move the cursor down below the roof. on grid D. 17 On the Design Bar. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the section. for Elevation. click Modify. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. enter -100 mm. and press ENTER. Adding a Roof | 101 . 15 On the Options Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point.14 On the Options Bar.

22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog.20 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. under Construction. In section. click Edit/New. (Element Properties). select Variable. and on the Options Bar. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. for Structure [1]. select the roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click Modify. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 30 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. double-click 06 Roof. 24 In the Project Browser. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. for Structure. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view.

41 Starting with the left front edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. Adding a Roof | 103 . click (Default 3D View). on the View Control Bar. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined.Roof Edge. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 37 If necessary. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. select Fascia : Fascia . zoom in to the roof. In this case. moving counter-clockwise. click Modify. select the section line. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. click OK. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. select each edge. 40 In the Type Selector. 38 In the 3D view. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.31 On the Design Bar.

Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. the curtain wall resizes with it. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. so if you resize the grid. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. under 3D Views. you add a curtain wall.42 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. Under Construction. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click 01 Entry Level. For Level. When you duplicate a type. select 05 Roof Garden. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. The type is saved in the project. enter 1050 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. For Offset. Click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click to place the first curtain wall segment. click Edit/New. for Spacing. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Retail Storefront. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Training Files. click Duplicate. enter 600 mm. for Join Condition. under Floor Plans. select 01 Entry Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Name dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. click Wall. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. For Height. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . enter 2100 mm. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. for Spacing.

under 3D Views. and lock the dimensions. click (Trim/Extend). 13 On the Design Bar. If you want to hide them. you can delete the dimensions. These dimensions are not in a sketch. double-click To Building. click Dimension. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. 15 On the View Control Bar. and trim each curtain wall segment. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . If the grid moves. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. so they remain in the view.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser.

You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance | 107 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.

clear one element to clear all the elements. 5 Under Visibility. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. All the elements in the list are selected. 7 Click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. as these usually represent internal pilasters. Do not select Columns. 2 On the View Control Bar.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Model Categories tab. and click None. and double-click South. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under the element list. To better work with the curtain wall panels. click All. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 6 Under Visibility. under Views (all). 8 Zoom in to the entrance area.

16 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 12 With the panels selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 18 On the View Control Bar. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. select Architectural Elevation. in the Type Selector. 10 Select 1 panel. and click OK. press and hold CTRL. 17 In the Project Browser. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. click Modify. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. in this case an architectural elevation. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select System Panel : Solid. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. under 3D Views. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. double-click {3D}. Creating an Entrance | 109 .9 On the Design Bar.

double-click South. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click To Building. under 3D Views. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 20 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser.

29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 32 In the Type Selector. Creating an Entrance | 111 . click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. select One Segment. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). select another mullion to the right. and click to select it. 24 On the Options Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. click Curtain Grid. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. and unpin it. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.

37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. select it. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Default 3D View). 34 On the View toolbar. and view the new entrance. press TAB until it is selected. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. and unpin it.

remove the mullions from the 2nd. and 4th panels. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . and add an entrance to the north side of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. open the North elevation. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.38 Press DELETE. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 39 Using the same process. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 40 Optionally.

under Floor Plans.rvt. select 02 Level. and click View Properties. double-click 01 Entry Level. 5 Click OK. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Right-click in the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Graphics.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Underlay.

which indicates you must draw the callout. and click to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click Rename. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. click Callout. select the grip closest to the callout head.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. The cursor changes to a pencil. and click OK. under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. enter Display Area. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 9 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the callout.

and click Flip Section. click Section. 12 Draw a section line. 13 Select the section line. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 16 Select the section box. as shown.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. right-click. 14 Press ESC. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. click Wall. double-click 01 Entry Level. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . For Loc Line.135mm Partition (2-hr). ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. click (Align). select Basic Wall : Interior . Click (Rectangle). 24 On the Tools toolbar. select Wall faces.17 In the Project Browser. enter Section Display Area. for Prefer. 25 Press ESC twice. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and click Rename. expand Sections (Building Section). 21 In the Type Selector. Lock both alignments. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior. right-click Section 1. 27 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

Notice that the walls extend to the floor. under Ceiling Plans.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 32 In the Type Selector. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. Next. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the dimension. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. click Ceiling. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 37 In the Project Browser. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and lock the dimension.) 36 Press ESC twice. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the View Control Bar. double-click Section Display Area. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. under Sections (Building Section).

Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections. and click (Element Properties). for Base Offset. for Height Offset From Level. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 47 In the Project Browser. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. and click OK. and click OK. click Modify. 43 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . Select the 02 Level Floor. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. and click to select the walls. 46 Press ESC. On the Options Bar. under Constraints. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. double-click Section Display Area. click to select it. double-click 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. enter 2700 mm. under Ceiling Plans. enter 2700 mm. for Top/Base. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. click Attach. and click to select the walls. under Constraints.

under Construction. double-click 01 Entry Level. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Rotate). 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click . click Cancel.49 In the Project Browser. for Structure. under Ceiling Plans. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. view the ceiling structure. click Edit/New. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 54 Click OK. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. for Type. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 58 On the Edit toolbar. click Edit.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . enter 45. and press ENTER.60 Click. 61 Press ESC. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.

64 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 67 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows On. 66 Optionally. click Shadows Off. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. Move the cursor over grid line B. double-click 01 Entry Level. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. and copy it to the 05 Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. and click to create a reference plane to the left. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1500 mm. and for Offset. click Training Files. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.rvt. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. and click to create a reference plane to the right. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair.

8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. C. 6 Select the left reference plane.5 On the Design Bar. 2. and 3. 7 Using the same method. shorten the right reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Stairs.

click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Click (Rectangle).■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select the 2nd reference plane. including its handrails. select Basic Wall : Generic . 10 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down. click Wall. beyond the end of the stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 .225mm Masonry. select Finish Face: Interior. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. The complete stair displays. and specify a point. 12 In the Type Selector.

and press ENTER. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall.15 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the interior face of the wall. Select the bottom of the stair. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. Click Modify. enter 1200 mm. 18 Using the same technique. Select the wall. Lock the dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Wall faces. click Align. select the dimension value. for Prefer. and specify a point away from the wall. click Dimension. and click to select it. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and lock the alignment.

23 Select the stair. TIP To flip the door swing. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. click Door. 27 In the Type Selector. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 28 On the Options Bar. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. and press DELETE. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. (Undo). Because the dimension is constrained.21 Select the dimension. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. a warning displays. The stair and walls move to the left. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . select both reference planes. 25 While pressing CTRL. 24 On the Standard toolbar. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. and press DELETE. clear Tag on Placement.

click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. select all 4 walls. (Rectangle). 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. (Default 3D View). (Element Properties). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). click 36 On the View toolbar. but if you view the top level of the building. Click OK. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.30 On the Design Bar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click OK. 33 Select the stair. select 05 Roof Garden. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). 44 On the Tools toolbar. click Align. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. for Base Constraint. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and move the cursor to spin the building model. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 35 On the View toolbar. For Top Constraint. for Multistory Top Level.

46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. (SteeringWheels). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. and lock the alignments. on the View toolbar. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and lock the alignment. click (Default 3D View). View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. click see the roof. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. and click OK. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door.

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. Under Constraints.55 In the Project Browser. for Base Offset. enter 300 mm. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. (SteeringWheels). and click OK. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. For Top Constraint. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 56 Select the shaft. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. (Default 3D View). By offsetting the base. click 59 On the View toolbar.

under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Right-click in the view. double-click 05 Roof Garden. for Underlay. select 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Wall. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. and click OK. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. and click View Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

16 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: South. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and click (Fillet arc). and press ENTER. click (Align). 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3.225mm Masonry. and on the Options Bar. click Remove Constraints.5 In the Type Selector. 15 In the error dialog. click Edit Profile. The exact placement is not important. and click Open View. select Basic Wall : Generic . 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. enter 9750. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 11 In the Go To View dialog. and then select the right face of the wall. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. click . 17 On the Options Bar.

select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. and click (Circle). Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 22 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. under 3D Views. click . double-click {3D}.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc.

Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . TIP After you place the 1st planter. 5 On the Basics tab. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Component. click Component.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.5 Meters. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 6 In the Type Selector.rvt. and press ESC twice.4. between grid lines C and D. as shown. select M_RPC Tree . 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. 10 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. For Offset.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Design Bar. 11 Select one of the trees. 17 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 remaining trees. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. click Duplicate. and click OK. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). under 3D Views. select M_RPC Tree .8 On the View toolbar. click Floor. and then click OK twice. for Height. enter 2400 mm. double-click 01 Entry Level. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click {3D}. for Type. 14 In the Name dialog. and in the Type Selector. View the roof. and on the Options Bar. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. (Element Properties). and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. under Floor Plans. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm.5 Meters. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Apply. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown. click Lines. under Dimensions.

26 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to place the line. 29 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). and click to sketch a line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 25 Using the same method. enter 0 mm. for Offset. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 .

35 Select the line that you just drew. click (Trim/Extend).30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. clear Chain. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor up 900 mm. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 32 Press ESC.

select M_RPC Male : Alex. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. enter -250 mm. 49 On the Options Bar. for Type.38 On the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . a photorealistic image displays. under Constraints. 45 Click OK. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 39 Select the sidewalk. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. In plan view. The completed sidewalk displays. Next. for Height Offset from Level. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 42 In the Name dialog. enter Sidewalk. 48 In the Type Selector. and click so he is facing the column. near Column E5. When you render an image. 43 Click OK twice. as shown: (Element Properties). select Rotate after placement. click Component. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape.

and place it along the sidewalk behind him. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 56 Press ESC twice. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 52 In the Type Selector. 54 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. select M_RPC Female : Cathy.NOTE If necessary. and click (Element Properties). 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. click Camera. about 30 degrees. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). click the car.

59 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. If the sidewalk changes height. 63 Click the sidewalk. under 3D Views. click Pick Host. and on the Options Bar. Next. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. double-click To Building. 64 Select Alex. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. When you select a host for a component. enter -300 mm. click Pick Host. 65 Click the sidewalk. and click OK. 66 Using the same method. 60 In the Project Browser. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. under Elevations. double-click West. under Constraints. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 .

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. After the service core is positioned. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and replace them with a service core. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. including the stairs. 5 On the View toolbar. and shaft opening. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 3 Select the entire stairwell. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (SteeringWheels). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. walls. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. click Training Files.rvt. under Floor Plans. 4 Press DELETE. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click 6 On the View toolbar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. you delete the entire stairwell. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click (Default 3D View).

click (Align). click OK. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. and click Create Instance. 13 In the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.rvt. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. and notice that the linked file is listed. under Floor Plans. right-click m_RRB_core. click Training Files. expand Groups. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click 00 Foundation. 14 In the Project Browser. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. and zoom in to the linked instance. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. expand Model. and on the Design Bar. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click (top down view). and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and click to align the center. click Modify. (Default 3D View). 18 Select the core. click Modify. ■ ■ Click grid line C. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. click 21 On the View toolbar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . 17 On the Design Bar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 20 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels).16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. or if the group layout is expected to change. click Ungroup.

and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.rvt. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. click Training Files. you add glass railings around the floor edges. In the left pane of the Open dialog. where it is hosted within a railing family. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. After you modify it. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.

click OK. under Floor Plans. and select Glass. and Parapet.rvt. and open Metric\m_Conference. 8 In the Project Browser.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 3 In the Conference project. click Training Files. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. The rendering displays. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 5 Expand Railing. Handrail only. press and hold CTRL. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. expand Families. double-click 02 Level. and expand Railings. and double-click Lounge Perspective. The floor sketch displays. and click to split the floor.rvt. in the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. expand Renderings. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. click (Split). 2 In the left pane of the dialog. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. This is the railing that you want to add to your model.

and on the Options Bar. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. click Modify. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. verify that Chain is not selected. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. and click to draw another line. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. click (Align).15 On the Design Bar. 25 Select grid line B. 24 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to draw another line. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Lines. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it.

33 On the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and click OK. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. For Offset. select Glass. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. for Type. 30 On the Design Bar. click Railing Properties. enter 100 mm. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt project. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Railing. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Align). and lock the alignment. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. click Dimension. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference.26 Select grid line D. Lock the dimensions. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown.

150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .37 On the Design Bar. 39 Click Finish Sketch. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Dimension. click Camera.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

NOTE For training purposes. and a roof garden. 153 . Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. balconies. slight modifications to the building design have been made. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. exterior fire stairs. lofty ceilings. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.

154 .

and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. including plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. how to create section and elevation views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 155 . you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn how to create new views from existing views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. you learn how to create views from a building model. section. elevation. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.

expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

4 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Level 2. and click OK. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.

13 In the Project Browser. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. and click OK. click the current scale. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Under Floor Plans. Next. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click 1: 1000.

rvt. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. 16 Right-click. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Elevation: Building Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select 1:100. 4 On the Options Bar. for Scale. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Elevation.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.

162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. 15 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). click Section. enter South East. ■ Move the cursor down. select 1:100. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South East. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 11 In the Project Browser. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and click OK. for Scale. under Elevations. 10 In the Rename View dialog.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Split Segment.

24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble.21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section). 23 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. using the blue circular drag grip. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 .

Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan. for Scale.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar.Resulting callout view . 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. click Callout. under Floor Plans. select 1:50. Creating Callout Views | 167 . ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

■ Select the middle grip. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. and select the callout boundary.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head.7 On the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Modify. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. select 1:50. click Callout. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. under Sections (Building Sections). Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 9 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. double-click Section 1. for Scale. 13 In the Type Selector.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

double-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 18 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename.17 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Section Head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. the elevation markers. and click Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.rfa. double-click Level 1. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. You change the appearance of the section mark head. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll to Section Marks. select the section line. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 12 For Section Tag. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and can be applied to the section line. 10 On the floor plan. and select 3. click Load into Project. 19 Click OK. enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK. select the current project. On the floor plan. clear any others. 17 Under Category.Custom. 15 Under Category. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. select Section Head .5mm Square. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 4 On the Design Bar. scroll to Section Line. 22 In the Name dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. for Section Head. Section Tail – Filled.Filled. and click OK twice. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. enter 12. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail . and select 2. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . .The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click OK.

24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. For Line Weight. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar.5 mm. . The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click Edit/New. select the current project. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. select 12. select Square. select 3. and on the Options Bar. Click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Square. for Callout Tag. 34 In the Name dialog. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. click Load into Project. . open Metric\Families\Annotations. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. clear all others. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 36 In the drawing.rfa. select Custom-Callout Head. click Duplicate. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. 40 Press ESC. for Elevation Tag. 39 Click OK twice. select the callout. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. On the floor plan. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 27 Click OK twice. For Corner Radius. and click Open.23 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. enter 12. click Edit/New. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK. For Dimensions ➤ Width. enter 6 mm.

scroll down to Callout Boundary. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. masking regions. view regions. filters. expand Callout Boundary. 46 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 43 Under Category. 49 Click OK. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 45 For Line Pattern. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. and select 7. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. and visual overrides. click the Annotation Objects tab. You learn to create view templates. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select Dash. and select 4.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click (Hide Crop Region). 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom to Fit.rvt. under Elevations. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and double-click East. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the View Toolbar. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Creating a View Template In this exercise. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. To accomplish this. click (Show Crop Region). Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click Training Files. The crop region displays as red. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.

Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. elevation markers. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Creating a View Template | 177 . and section lines are now hidden in the view. Callouts. grids. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 13 On the View Control bar. clear Entourage. 11 Under Visibility. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. levels.

14 In the Project Browser. and click Create View Template From View. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 16 In the View Templates dialog. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. edit the crop region as before. under Elevations. and click OK. 20 Using the same method. click OK. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 15 In the New View Template dialog.rvt. 17 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 18 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North. and click Apply View Template. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. right-click East. click Apply. and click OK. under Elevations.

click Edit. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click. under Floor Plans. double-click Penthouse. and click Properties. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Click OK twice. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for View Range. Under View Depth. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bottom. for Level. select Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.rvt. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents.

double-click Roof Plan. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. for View Range. and click Properties. select Level 4. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. under Extents. for Bottom. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. select Roof Plan.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. right-click. for Level. click Edit.

click Edit. for Level. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. under Extents. select Unlimited. 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. In the left corner of the building. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . click Region Properties.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Under View Depth. click Finish Sketch. select Unlimited. Move you cursor diagonally. for Bottom. Click OK twice. click Plan Region.

under Views (all).rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. the fire rating of the walls. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Filters tab. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. in this case. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. After you apply the filter. 1 In the Project Browser.17 On the Design Bar. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. click Modify.

12 On the Filter tab. for Pattern. select Solid Fill. 16 Click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. 11 Select Rated Walls. select Walls. 17 Using the same method.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Fire Rating. 14 In the Color dialog. click Remove. click Add. and click OK. click Override under Patterns. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. under Categories. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . and click OK. under Projection/Surface. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. click Edit/New. select the red color. click OK. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. and click OK. and apply a color. 5 In the Filters dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. for Color. enter Rated Walls. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click <No Override>. under Basic colors. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click (New). 9 Click OK. Select contains. 10 On the Filter tab. Enter Hr. for Rated Walls. under Filters. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 6 In the Filter Name dialog.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.

6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left.rvt. select Invisible lines. click Masking Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Show Crop Region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 8 Select the crop region. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 On the View menu. 9 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . under Floor Plans. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 11 In the Type Selector. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 5 On the View menu. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. as shown. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Rectangle). 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.Level 1. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click OK. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 11 Click OK twice. and click Rename. for Pattern. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.rvt. click in the Patterns field. select Solid fill. click black. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click. under Pattern Overrides. and click Override. 7 Under Cut. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. select Walls. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click. 4 On the View Control Bar. for Color. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click the current scale.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click 1: 50. under Visibility. and click OK. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog.

Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Grids. 16 Under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click Modify. under Visibility. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click.

and click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. select Dash. right-click. click Override. By using the previous method to make the selection. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. under Lines. click <No Override> to apply a color. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Pattern. for Color.20 Right-click. click a purple color. 23 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click Projection Lines.

click By Category Override. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. 29 In the Color dialog.28 For Color. click Modify. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 30 On the Design Bar. select a bright green color. right-click. and click OK twice.

how to add views to the sheets. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.33 On the View Control Bar. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click Training Files.Creating Sheets. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click OK. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. select A0 metric.rvt. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.

For Sheet Name. enter Site Plan. enter A101. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the title block. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.Unnamed. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 5 When the title block highlights. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. Click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. on the Options Bar. For Sheet Number. 7 On the Design Bar. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify.

For Project Name. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 2009. under Other. enter Freighthouse Flats. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter J. For Project Number. enter 15 May. enter 2009-1. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. click Edit. For Project Status. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. for Project Address. 14 Click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Smith. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Client Name. enter For Approval.

Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Layout Plan A104 . 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Stairs In the following exercise. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. select the new sheet name. select A0 metric. and click OK. enter Floor Plan.Elevations A106 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt. for Name. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Sections A108 . and click OK. and click Save. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. 17 In the Project Browser.Elevations A105 . you add views to these sheets. right-click.

click Modify. select Level 1. double-click A102 . and click to place it. under Sheets (all). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations. and click to place the view. 4 On the Design Bar. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . under Floor Plans. under Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. The red border around the view no longer displays. double-click A104 . 6 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and drag it to the sheet. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Floor Plan. 2 In the Project Browser.

under Sheets (all). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. click Modify. double-click A107 .Sections. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 12 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. select 1:5. and on the Options Bar. 16 Select title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. for View Scale. move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights. and click OK. zoom in to the grip. .

and click to place it. click Modify. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. under Floor Plans. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. double-click Level 1. 18 Under Floor Plans. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 19 On the Design Bar.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Stairs. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A108 . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. under Sheets (all).

Sections. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. In order to do this. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. right-click. double-click A107 . 2 Select the building section view. click Modify. and click Activate View. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. enter 16700 mm. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 5 On the Design Bar. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. and press ENTER. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you must first activate the view on the sheet. and then make changes and deactivate the view.rvt. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 .

and click Deactivate View.rvt. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 Right-click. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.

The camera view displays.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. right-click. and click Properties. 7 Place the camera as shown. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. enter T. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. select the new sheet name. and click OK. select A0 metric. Click OK. click Camera. double-click Level 1.

click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Under Extents. Click OK. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter 1500 mm. for Eye Elevation. 12 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active. enter 18000 mm.Title Sheet. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Target Elevation. double-click T . For Far Clip Offset. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Camera. under Sheets (all). and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 100000 mm.8 On the Options Bar.

enter 635 mm. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Size. click Modify. for Height. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. . Click Apply. click Modify. 24 Click OK twice. for Show title. click Edit/New. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Duplicate. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select Scale (locked proportions). on the Options Bar.15 With the view selected. enter Viewport/no title mark. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and then click OK. under Graphics. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Under Model Crop Size. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. select No.

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

207 . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Tagging Objects In this lesson. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Because of the open style floor plan. such as room and window schedules. You also learn to create different types of schedules. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.Level 1. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as doors and windows. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.rvt.

as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. click Room Separation.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). and click Room and Area. as shown: 5 Using the same method. right-click in the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method. 9 In the Tags dialog. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 7 On the Design Bar. click Load. click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

click it.rfa. 13 On the Options Bar. and click to place the room and tag. click Modify. 11 In the Tags dialog. type U18-1. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Room. and the rectangle contains the room tag. indicating that it can be edited. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. and select the room tag. 14 For Offset. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 16 On the Design Bar. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click OK. and press ENTER. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. type 2400 mm.

18 Click the room text label. click Modify. Click to place the new room and tag. 23 Using the same method. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Dining. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. 22 Click the room text label. type Kitchen. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . type Entry. click Room. and press ENTER. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. click Modify. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. place rooms and tags. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

clear Room Separation. but they need to be tagged. and click OK. and moving clockwise. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. on the Model Categories tab. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Modify.Level 2. click Room Tag. under Floor Plans. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. The rooms are already placed.

You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . expand Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. clear Leader. you learn how to place door and window tags.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Level 1.rvt.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. type Storage. for room 101. type Corridor. For 103. The room Number is U17-46. type Building Entry. For 104. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 11 Using the same method. 101-106. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. for Name. next to Rows. select Storage. add 5 more rooms. click New. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 105. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 102. select Corridor. and press ENTER. and press ENTER.

■ For 106. select 9. 13 Save the file. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click the bright green swatch. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. under Projection/Surface. place rooms from a program list. under Visibility. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. expand Lines. In the Lines field. you add room separation lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the Lines field. and press ENTER. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. double-click Level 1. For Weight. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click the Color field. Under Custom colors. under Floor Plans. 4 Click OK twice. For Room Separation. click Override. and modify room names. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. type Stair.

Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Room. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First. click Modify. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Room Separation. draw the horizontal line. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 On the Options Bar. for Room. select 102 Storage. type 2400 mm. 14 For Offset. 13 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 101 Building Entry. for Room. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).

20 While pressing CTRL. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Using the same method. double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. and zoom in to the Corridor. place the following rooms. under Schedules/Quantities. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105).15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Modify.

The Room Style Schedule displays without data. type As Selected. for Rows. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and Wall Finish. type Units. under Category. and for all 3 finishes. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and click OK. Floor Finish. and click Add. click 23 On the Design Bar. 31 For Key Name. 30 On the Options Bar. click New. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Constraints. and click OK. select Rooms. click Schedule/Quantities. click Modify. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. clear Room Bounding. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog.21 On the Options Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. select Base Finish. while pressing CTRL. (Element Properties). 24 Open the Room Schedule. 27 Select Schedule keys. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Available fields.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans. select Room Style. 38 Under U17-8. for Room Style. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fields. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. and click Add. and click Properties. 36 Click OK twice. under Identity Data.32 Using the same method. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 In the Filter dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. click Edit. 42 On the Options Bar. right-click Room Schedule. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. select Units. and click OK. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. select Units. under Other. click (Element Properties). 33 In the Project Browser. click Check None. 44 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. select Rooms. for Available fields. and click OK. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 37 Open the Room Schedule. double-click Level 1. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents.

You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. at the warning prompt. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. type Room Type. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 48 Save the file. select Public. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 103. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). for Name. For rooms 102 and 105. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click OK. select Room Style. 104. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click OK. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click the Color Scheme field. (Duplicate). type Room Type. for Color. and click Properties. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. expand Floor Plans. and 106. click 5 For Title.rvt.46 Open the Room Schedule. right-click Level 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Service. under Graphics. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined.

a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. select Room Type. expand Lines. 19 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Edit. click the value in the Color column.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Schemes. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 14 Click OK twice. click Modify. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . and click OK. clear Visible. click Edit Color Scheme. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Visibility. and clear Room Separation. click Color Scheme Legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the color legend. When you move the cursor over the drawing area.

22 In the Color dialog. 23 Using the same method. for Swatch Width. 28 Under Title Text. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click Modify. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Size. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK twice. (Element Properties). change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. respectively. select blue. type 25 mm. 24 Click OK. and click OK. on the Options Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. type 5 mm. under Graphics. under Custom color. click Edit/New.

under Visibility. 35 Click OK twice. and select Properties. click Color Scheme Legend. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Sections. under Sections. for Color Scheme. double-click Building Section. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . click Edit.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Graphics. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. right-click Building Section. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. and click OK. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. select Room Type. select Rooms. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view.

46 Click . for Room Style. for Room Style. and click OK. select Public. under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Units. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Filter dialog. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. under Identity Data. select all the rooms in the stairwell. click . (Filter Selection). 41 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. 47 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Service. click New. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . under Identity Data. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. and click OK. for Rows. for Room Style. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 51 On the Options Bar. double-click Room Style Schedule.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. excluding the stairwell spaces. under Schedules/Quantities. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. type Suites. 54 While pressing CTRL. under Key Name for the new row. and click . select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 52 In the Room Style Schedule.

59 Under Room Area Computation. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Volume Computations. The color fill extends to the roof. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. and click OK. select the room on the left side of the top floor. for Room Style. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that At wall finish is selected. The color fill will extend to the roof. select Suites. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. select Areas and Volumes. and click OK.55 Click . under Identity Data. but not beyond it. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

. 67 On the first level. select the stairwell room. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 66 Click OK. and the living room. type 0. type -254 mm. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 69 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 2. 70 For Limit Offset. 72 On the Design Bar. under Constraints.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 68 Click . the dining room.0. 71 Click OK. select Loft. click Modify.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click {3D}.73 Save the file. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. under 3D Views. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.

For Then by. and click OK. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. click Family and Type. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click Add. click Modify. 9 Using the same method. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . under Category. under Available fields.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 3 While pressing CTRL. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Clear Itemize every instance. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 4 In the Type Selector. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.EPDM. select Material: Description. Select Grand totals. select Family and Type. select Roofs. 5 On the Design Bar.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building.

13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. type Estimated Cost. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. select Currency. select Material: Cost. select Material: Area. and click Properties. click Estimated Cost. 19 For Type. and click OK twice. under Other. select Calculate totals. 12 Click OK. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. Under Field formatting. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. for Fields.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Available fields.40 50. 21 Click OK. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and under Fields. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). for Material: Cost. 17 Click Calculated Value. click the Formatting tab. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. for Name. 23 For Field formatting. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 20 For Formula. click Edit.

Digit grouping. creating a generic tag to tag the family. click the Format value. 28 For Unit symbol. either within family components or within the project template. for Currency. In this lesson. regardless of category. not just for currency. and reporting the shared parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and schedule the total distance of each path. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. 29 Select Use digit grouping. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you create an exiting plan for the building. The cost fields are formatted correctly. you create a shared parameter file. 30 Click OK twice. 27 In the Format dialog. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. can be used for any number-based parameter. 31 Save the file. You draw a travel path line. which inserts commas after every three digits. tag the line. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. for Rounding. adding the shared parameters to a family. select $. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. and are defined and stored in an external file. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. These shared parameters can be added to any family. 26 In the Project Units dialog.

for Name.rvt. click Training Files. type Exiting. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.txt. 11 Click OK twice. type Path ID. under Groups. for Type of Parameter. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. for Name. click Training Files. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. click New. 7 Under Parameters. and click Save. for Name. 1 In the Project Browser. for File name. 9 Under Parameters. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Length.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. under Floor Plans. click New. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. type Travel Distance. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Create. click New. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.

under Dimensions. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. click Add. 10 Using the same method. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. in the Load into Projects dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Load into Projects. and select Instance. 15 If necessary. Click Training Files. for Travel Distance Formula.rvt. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameters. select Shared parameter. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . and click OK.rfa.rvt. and click OK. 13 Click Apply. select Constraints.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Parameter Data. 8 Select Instance. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and click Select. 4 In the Family Types dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. click Add. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. following the equals symbol (=). You then create a generic tag to tag the family. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. type Length. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. under Parameter Type. under Parameters. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 14 On the Design Bar. If you have multiple projects open. group it under Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Group parameter under. click Family Types. 11 Click OK. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog.

24 Click OK twice. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. under Category Parameters. click Select.rft. 25 In the Edit Label dialog.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. select Travel Distance. under Parameters. click (Add Parameter). (Add 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 19 On the Design Bar. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Training Files. click parameter(s) to label).

rvt is selected. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. and press DELETE. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. click Modify. select Path ID. and click OK. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .rfa. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 35 Save the file. and click Save. 32 In the Save As dialog.28 On the Design Bar. and move it down. 29 In the drawing window. for File Name. 33 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects.

above the exterior door as shown. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Exiting Plan . 6 Move the cursor to the right. After the lines are tagged.Level 1. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. select Chain. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Placing. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Tagging. and click in the center of the corridor. click Component.rvt.

Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. type 1-1. for Path ID. and click (Element Properties). move the cursor near the right corner. verify that Chain is selected.Level 2. click Modify. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints.7 Move the cursor down. under Floor Plans. double click Exiting Plan . through the door. and click outside of the building. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Component. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar.Tagging. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. clear Leader. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 13 While pressing CTRL. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . click Modify. Placing.

21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click in the stair. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the left. 23 Move the cursor down.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. click Component. and click. and click above the door to the stair. 20 On the Design Bar.

28 While pressing CTRL. under Constraints. 27 On the Design Bar. 30 Using the same method. Placing. . and click OK.Tagging. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.24 On the Design Bar. under Category. click Modify. for Path ID. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. type 2-1. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. type Level 1 Exit Distance. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. and click OK. 33 For Name.

right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Travel Distance. 50 Save the file. 36 For Filter by. select Path ID. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select Path ID and Travel Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Properties. in the second field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 35 Click the Filter tab. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Rename. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and in the third field. select Calculate totals. 41 Under Fields. 49 Click OK twice. while pressing CTRL. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Add. type 2-. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. select contains. type Level 2 Exit Distance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter by. in the first field. 38 For Sort by. and under Field formatting. click Edit. under Other. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 In the Rename View dialog. for Filter. in the third field. select Path ID. click Training Files. 43 In the Project Browser. type 1-. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 42 Click OK. under Available fields. 46 In the Project Browser.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click the Fields tab. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. right-click the Design Bar. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . under Identity Data.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. for Assembly Code. 4 Under Available fields.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interiors ➤ C10 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . click Schedule/Quantities.Fixed Partitions. select the following fields. expand C . under Categories. 10 In the schedule. 9 Click OK twice. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Walls. and click . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click the Value field. right-click Generic . and select C1010145 . and click OK.152 mm. and click Properties.Partitions . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. and click View.

rvt. click Create. click Training Files.mdb). NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. type Revit_Project. select a location for the database file. for Database Name. 3 Click New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 8 In the New Database dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 11 Click OK 3 times. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click OK. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK to create the database. and click Next. click the File Data Source tab. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 9 Under Directories.11 Close the exercise file. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click Next. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 1 On the File menu. 6 Click Finish. the database display may be different than that shown.mdb. under Database.

This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Additionally.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. 13 Close the exercise file. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. For example. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.

262 .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. 263 . as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. These components display at the required scale. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. In the callout view. plywood. and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. like a standard door header condition. 297 . add detail components. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. In order to detail from the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. you trace over the building model geometry. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson.

double-click the detail callout head. After you add components. region objects. click Training Files. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.rvt. You load detail components. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 5 In the alert dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as well as detail lines. They are also view specific. and click Open. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. click Training Files. and insulation objects. click Detail Component. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The roof overhang detail displays. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the model as an underlay for the detail.Detailing the View In this exercise. which means that all detail components. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. select As underlay. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.rfa. 7 In the drawing area. Exact location is not important. you detail the view of the roof edge.

click Duplicate. 16 Click OK twice. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Detailing the View | 299 . Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.8 Delete the component. click Repeating Detail. 15 For Spacing. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click (Element Properties). select Corrugated Metal. 13 In the Name dialog. click Modify. click Edit/New. enter 406. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the drawing area. and click OK.5mm. 10 On the Options Bar.

20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and click Open. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Training Files. click Load. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 24 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar.rfa. ■ ■ Click Modify. click (Move). navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.

32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 31 To properly orient the component. you load them as a group from a single file. click Detail Component. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and place it in the detail view as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.rvt. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 30 In the Type Selector.Because you still have several components to load. and click Open. Detailing the View | 301 . click Training Files. click OK. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. press SPACEBAR 3 times.

302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click the Flip instance arrows. 37 Click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 38 Select the horizontal segment. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector.

and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. click (Move). Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 42 Click Modify. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. enter 140mm. click Insulation. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. click Detail Component. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. For Offset. Detailing the View | 303 . select to near side.

51 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. and lock the component. select Thin Lines. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 47 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. meaning they display only in this view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.45 In the Type Selector.rvt. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 2 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add lines to your detail. click Detail Lines. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Like detail components. they are view specific. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. as shown. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector.

select Thin Lines. For Offset. For Offset. click Detail Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. click Detail Lines. 11 In the Type Selector.4 Click Modify. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 5 Select the vertical plywood component. enter 10mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . as shown. and press ENTER. as shown. select Medium Lines. enter 10mm. 7 In the Type Selector. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component.

15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. click (Draw). and clear Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and press ENTER. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 22 In the Project Browser. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. Click (Pick Lines). select the Penthouse level line. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . select Do not display. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. draw the detail lines as shown. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click OK. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. For Offset. 26 In the Type Selector. right-click. click Detail Lines. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Thin Lines. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. When you turn the display model off. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Properties. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.18 In the Type Selector. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. select Vapor Barrier. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

30 In the Type Selector. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 32 Click Modify. select M_Break Line. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. click Detail Component.29 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you add text notes to complete the detail.

click Dimension. Click again to specify the location of the text box. click Text. and click to place the dimension.rvt. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 6 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes | 309 . Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Enter the text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 2 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click OK. right-click.7 Select the dimension line. click Roof Overhang Detail. select a text note. enter Typ. under Text Fields. Creating Detail Components on page 310. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. right-click. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click the dimension text. and click OK. and save the exercise file. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. click Select All Instances. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click. and click OK..rvt. and click Rename.Keynotes. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. for Suffix. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click 6 In the Filter dialog. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . clear Detail Items and Dimensions. (Filter Selection). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and press DELETE. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rft. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. pressing TAB. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. while pressing CTRL. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. select Medium Lines. 14 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. in the Type Selector.7 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 16 Click Modify. select all the coping linework. Creating Detail Components | 311 . click Training Files. and selecting the chain. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component.

25 In the Filter dialog. 30 In the drawing area. double-click it in the Project Browser. click . click Detail Component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to your preferred location. While pressing SHIFT. 24 On the Options Bar. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. and the component can be placed in the detail. 27 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. 23 Using a window. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail .Keynotes view is not the open view. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. delete the underlying linework. and click Save. Adding Keynotes on page 312.18 In the Save As dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. select the coping. The original linework remains selected. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Roof Edge. click Load. 21 To place the component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. you place keynotes on objects. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Detail Items. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Click Modify. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Load into Projects. and click OK. 26 Press DELETE. and click Open. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. click Training Files. for File name.rfa.

Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. In the Keynotes dialog. and click Open.C1. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. 63mm Rigid Insulation. use keynote 07645. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. Adding Keynotes | 313 .D11. 6 Click Modify. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element.rvt. use keynote 06160. click Edit/New. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Roof Edge4.B5. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. For the metal coping. 19mm Plywood. (Element Properties). Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rfa. 2 In the alert dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click to place the leader arm.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . use keynote 06110. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. FasciaProfile_1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.20 Ga. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.A8. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. using keynote 07460.9 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to 07645. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 18 Save the file.G1. use keynote 06110.F1. click Detail Component. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge.D11.I1. click Keynote ➤ Element. For the 50 x 200.D1. 22mm Corrugated Steel . select Corrugated Metal. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 300. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. You do this in order to keynote the component.F1. use keynote 06160. For the 50 x 150. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 17 Keynote the component. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 12 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 09250. 15 In the Type Selector.

click Detail Component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 16 Select the component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 9 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar.rvt. 19 In the Name dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 11 Press DELETE. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 15 Click Modify. 24 While pressing CTRL. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. click Edit/New. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel.rft. and click Save. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. click Training Files. select Medium Lines. select the left end point of the reference line. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . click Detail Component. and click (Element Properties). 6 Lock the line. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 20 Click OK 3 times. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Save As dialog. 5 In the drawing area. and select the right end point. and click Modify. for File name. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. click Load into Projects.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Medium Line Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Open. click Duplicate. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.

29 In the drawing area. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. enter EPDM Membrane. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Duplicate. 49 With the component selected. and click the lower end at the break line. click Edit/New. 48 Using the same method used previously. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. click in the Value column. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. and click . invisible. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. click (Move). 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . and click . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.A5. and assign it keynote 06110.25 Next.A1. 28 In the Type Selector.G1. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 31 Select the component. and assign it keynote 07260. 34 In the Name dialog. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 38 On the Design Bar. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 41 Select the component just added. click Detail Component. click Detail Component. and click . and click OK. 47 Select the component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Click Modify. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click Modify. 44 On the Design Bar. name the component Air Barrier. against the 19mm plywood. 30 Click Modify. and hidden) used in the view. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. 42 Using the same method used previously. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 52 In the Type Selector. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . click Detail Component. 55 Click Modify. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 53 On the Options Bar. leaving the detail component lines. select Chain.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.

68 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 60 On the Design Bar.A4. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. select Invisible Lines. Air Barrier. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. select the component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 61 In the drawing area. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.rfa. 67 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 07260.rfa. click Keynote ➤ Element. in the Type Selector. and Vapor Barrier. 63 In the drawing area. 50 x 200 Framing.58 Using the method used previously. name the component Vapor Barrier.

72 Save the file. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click Browse. 70 Using the method used previously. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 71 In the drawing area. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.. name the component Batt Insul. and press ENTER. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click File menu ➤ Save. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and press TAB.A9. The database file opens in a text editor. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. under Keynote Table. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.A4.69 Select the component. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Enter 07463.rvt.A1. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt. and click . Enter 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . and assign it keynote 07210. and press TAB. add a keynote for the component. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and close the text editor. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the text editor.

After you create a drafting view. click Keynote ➤ Element.A1. and click Open. 14 Save the file. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 13 Click Modify. select Absolute. you learn how to create a drafted detail. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. In the Type Selector. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select all the keynotes. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. navigate to 07463. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. and click OK. under Path Type. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 11 Click Modify. 9 In the drawing area. Each keynote displays as a simple number. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.txt. and click OK. click to place the leader. and click to place the note. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.

right-click Drafting 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. For Colors. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select 1 : 5. The detail is imported as an import symbol. For Positioning. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. and click OK. select Black and White. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. for Scale. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Click Open. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . enter EPDM Metal Coping. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.dwg. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that Auto . and click Rename. click Training Files.rvt. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail.Center to Center is selected. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

10 In the Rename dialog. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. delete the existing value. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area.No Reference. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Rename. select Reference other view.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Callout. click Edit/New. for New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 Select the callout. and click Properties. 12 Click OK twice. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). enter Detail . 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 5 Click Modify.

and double-click the callout./Sect.Elev. The callout is updated with the sheet information. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays.No Reference). click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. double-click A105 ./Det. 18 Save the file. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.

enter Gyp. click Region Properties. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 5 In the Type Selector. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Component. . click Filled Region. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.rvt. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Name dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Board. select Gypsum-Plaster. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 14 Click OK 3 times. and click OK. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Header @ Sliding Door. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. for Name.

17 Click Modify. click Finish Sketch. and on the Edit toolbar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click (Draw). click . select Wide Lines. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. 19 In the Type Selector. select the width dimension. select the left and bottom edges of the region.5mm. 20 On the Design Bar. (Mirror). 16 Select the left edge of the region. 18 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . Draw a rectangle as shown. and enter 20.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click 22 On the Options Bar.

31 In the Type Properties dialog. Move the cursor up. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. 33 Click OK 3 times. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Wood . and click OK. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. for Name. . click Edit/New. 30 In the Name dialog. click Filled Region.Finish. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click Region Properties. 25 Click Modify. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Wood . 24 Select the mirrored region. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.Finish. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click . click (Rectangle). select Medium Lines. 37 On the Design Bar.5mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . click (Align). and select the right edge of the wood region.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. select Medium Lines. sketch the new region as shown. in the Type Selector. 38 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 40 On the Options Bar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 39 In the Type Selector. Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. verify that the thickness is 19mm. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.

Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click 48 Click Modify. For Offset. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. click Filled Region. (Align). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. and press ENTER.42 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. 46 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. click Finish Sketch. 47 Click the reference plane. For Offset. enter 6mm.

Move the cursor left 25mm. For Offset. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and press ENTER. 54 On the Tools toolbar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Select Chain. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . enter 0. click Finish Sketch. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm. Move the cursor down 305mm. and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar. and click to select the point. and click to select the point.

59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Detail Lines. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . top. select Medium Lines. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.2mm. 58 In the Type Selector. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 60 Select the left. and press ENTER. 65 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. enter 76. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.rfa. 62 Select the left detail line. click Load. 61 Click Modify.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select the height dimension. For Offset. 68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. enter 3mm. and right edges of the door panel region. and click Open. click Detail Component.

74 Select the expansion bolt. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 76 In the Type Selector. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. and click Open. click Detail Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines.rfa. use the images as a guide. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.70 On the Design Bar. click Load. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Detail Component. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 84 On the Design Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines.78 On the Design Bar. click . click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 79 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 87 Click Modify. 82 Select the rectangle. (Mirror). select Thin Lines. 85 On the Options Bar. 80 On the Options Bar.

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 92 Select the line. click (Mirror). select Medium Lines. and on the Edit toolbar. 89 On the Design Bar.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 90 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. as shown. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left.

334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. select the length dimension.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click Detail Lines. 97 On the Options Bar. select M_Break Line. 95 On the Design Bar. 102 In the Type Selector. 101 On the Design Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. enter 3mm. click Detail Component. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. click . and click to place the arc as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. and press ENTER. 99 Click Modify. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left.

106 Click to place the dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar. 105 In the drawing area. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Dimension. click Dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region.5mm Arial. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 110 Select the dimension line. drag the text for the smaller dimension. and click Modify. using the Drag Text grip.

Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click the dimension text. click Dimension. 114 Click OK.2. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 113 Under Text Fields. for Below. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. 118 Select Modify to end the command.5mmArial. and then click the dimension text. and enter Varies. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter See Schedule.

128 Select the note. select the gypsum board region on the left. 126 In the drawing area. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Board. and on the Options Bar. click Text. Enter 225 mm @ Type C.121 Click OK. 127 Enter Gyp. 125 In the Options Bar. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. click to create an arced leader. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 123 Click OK. and click to place the text. click (Add Right Arc Leader). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 .

131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

Creating a Note Block In this exercise. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. and double-click East. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 339 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.rvt. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Modify. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.rfa. for Number of Leaders. 5 On the Options Bar. type 1. click Training Files. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select the keynote.Hexagon.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Symbol.

and click OK. type Seal existing doors and insulate. and click above the tag to place the copy. for Text. 13 Select the tag. on the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Element Properties).9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. Creating a Note Block | 341 . click (Copy). 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

type B. 19 With the tag selected. 18 Using the same method. (Mirror).14 With the copy selected. 17 Click OK. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. on the Edit toolbar. 15 For Text. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and click. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. type Repair existing door surround. click (Element Properties). click Copy.

Clean existing concrete loading dock. click Modify. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . and moving counter-clockwise. Repair existing door surround. using the table as a reference. Repair as required. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Tuckpoint as required. Clean exterior brick wall. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Remove all existing windows.21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 22 Optionally.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and drag it to the sheet. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . On the Appearance tab. for Header text. for Note block name. for Heading. select Tag. under Available fields. Create. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and click Add. 29 In the Project Browser. type Exterior Construction Notes. select Tag. select Center. format.Elevations. for Sort by. type Description. select Exterior Construction Notes. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. type 6 mm.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and click Add. verify that Arial is selected. 28 In the Project Browser. type Mark. Select Text. 26 Click OK. expand Schedules/Quantities. On the Formatting tab. and double-click A103 . expand Sheets (all). 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and for Alignment. 27 In the column header (text). Clean cut and repair wall as required. and select Bold. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for the value. and click OK.

31 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.Title Sheet. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.rvt. double-click T . you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and in the third field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. select does not equal. expand Schedules/Quantities. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . in the second field. double-click T . Select Sheet Name. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. 6 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. and click Add. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. ■ 4 Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. and click Add. in the first field. 5 In the list title field. The drawing list displays. under Sheets (all). for Sort by. under Available fields. type T. for Filter by. On the Filter tab. and drag it to the sheet.

Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. Training File Using Legends | 347 . annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. 11 Save the file. windows. For the text. click Modify. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends.9 On the Design Bar. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. On construction documents. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. and so on). and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. door frame schedule. Finally. On construction documents. doors. and door frames.

you create a text type with the necessary size. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. select Arial. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . click Edit/New. type 3mm. click Symbol.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . for Name. 9 For Text Font.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type Legend Text. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 For Text Size. type Typical Symbol Legend.Open Level Head . click Text.rvt. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. click Duplicate. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. expand Sheets (all). verify that is selected. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and double-click A101 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. expand Legends. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. click Typical Symbol Legend. and for Leader. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.Site Plan/Floor Plan. 16 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 14 Working from the top down.

350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 18 On the Design Bar.Unit 18. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. select Viewport : No Titlemark.17 In the Type Selector. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 23 Save the file. 19 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : No Titlemark. double-click A102 . click Modify. under Sheets.

select Section.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. type 4th Floor Wall Types. type 900 mm. For View. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . for Name. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Legend Component. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and press ENTER. select 1 : 50. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. For Host length. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 3 For Scale.rvt. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Medium for Detail Level. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar.

10 Select the second wall. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.9 On the Design Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Text. 12 In the Type Selector. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. for Family. click Modify. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. and on the Options Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 13 On the Options Bar.

17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. select Level 4. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click New Sheet. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 19 Type the following text. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. under Floor Plans. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. right-click Sheets (all). The text note with leader is added to the legend. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

click Modify to end the command. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 26 On the Design Bar. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Legends. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.25 In the Project Browser. The open drawings are both visible. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 4. drag it onto the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

Creating a Component Legend | 355 . click (Match Type). The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 34 Select the patio divider wall. select the Wall Type 2 component. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 35 On the View Control Bar. 33 In the floor plan view. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. select Detail Level: Medium. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar.

and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. double-click Level 4.36 Optionally. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. These changes can be due to owner requests. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. In this exercise. click 37 Save the file. under Floor Plans. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using the table. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project.rvt. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . contractor inquiries. or changes in building material availability. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.

In most instances. for Numbering. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. type a date. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. verify that Per Project is selected. In general. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 5 For Description. When you use this option. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. When Issued is selected.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. the revision is locked and issued to the field. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. For example. If Visible is not selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. If you select Per Sheet. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . yet as concise as possible. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 7 Under Show. if the active revision is number 1. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.

and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 5 Select the divider. move the cursor up. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 6 On the Design Bar. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. double-click Level 4. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 3 Select the divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. including revision number and revision date.rvt. click (Move). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 9 Save the file. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Edit toolbar.8 Click OK. you make changes to the project floor plan.

8 In the drawing area. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. select Snaps Off. click Revision Cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. In the Snaps dialog.

for Line Weight. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 6. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you load a revision tag into the project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 17 Save the file. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.

rfa. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project. Because you chose to number by project. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. double-click Level 4. 10 In the drawing area.rvt. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 8 In the Tags dialog. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You then issue a revision. click Tag ➤ By Category. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Tags dialog. click Tags. the cloud is tagged as number 1. click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. select Leader. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click to place the tag. 12 Save the file. under Floor Plans. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. 6 Click Load. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. you need to add one. click Training Files.

Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. click Add. 7 For Description. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE After you issue a revision. type Modify Paving Area. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 9 Click OK. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click A107 . with the description Relocate Door. and enter a date. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Add another revision row. you prevent further changes to the revision. and enter a date for the revision.rvt. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. under Sheets. You can continue to add revisions. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision.Unnamed. select Issued. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You do this by issuing the revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you can no longer modify it.

10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Unnamed. double-click A107 . 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. in the drawing area. apply Seq. 2 . for Revision. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select Revision Cloud. click to add a revision clouds.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select the revision cloud.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 17 Using the same method learned previously. under Floor Plans. 19 To add tags. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 20 On the Project Browser. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 3 . Working with Revisions | 363 . select Seq. double-click Level 4.Modify Paving Area. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 11 On the Drafting tab. 12 In the drawing area. select Tag ➤ By Category.

Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. clear Issued. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. select Alphabetic. for Numbering. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. height. beginning with "D". 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. for Sequence. delete the first 3 characters. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. you edit the titleblock family. and rotation) to the revision schedule. For each revision. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 26 In the drawing area. You do this so that the revision can be changed. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. select the titleblock. 25 Click OK twice. Click Options. In order to make formatting changes (appearance.

Select Grid lines. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for Build Schedule. right-click Revision Schedule. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. select Bottom-up. Working with Revisions | 365 . 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. click Load into Projects. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Clear Blank row before data. and click Properties. and drag it above the schedule area. click Edit. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. 28 In the alert dialog. click Yes. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Modify. under Other. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. for Appearance. click Edit Family. 34 On the Design Bar. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. click Yes. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Select Outline. and press DELETE. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. and select Wide Lines for the outline type.27 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the schedule header. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog.

and click Properties. select the revision schedule. When the height property is variable. 45 On the Appearance tab. click Edit. for Heading. With a user-defined height. select 90° Counterclockwise. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. open the titleblock family for editing. right-click Revision Schedule. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 46 Click OK twice. select User defined. for Rotation on Sheet. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. for Height. for Formatting. and on the Options Bar.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. enter Rev. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area.. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock.

click Load into Projects. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. text. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you learn to import information (such as images. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. 51 Save the file.

rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.JPG. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. under Sheets.rvt. and place it on a sheet.Title Sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Importing Image Files In this exercise. click Training Files. click Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. double-click T . under Sheets. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click to add text without a leader. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. click Modify. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 6 Select the text. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 9 On the Design Bar.doc text file in another window. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 11 Save the file. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. with the new text box still selected. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.

you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 5 Click OK. 10 On the Design Bar. and saved as Fixture Schedule.JPG. and click Save. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. This step has been completed for you. double-click A102 . under Sheets. select the document writer. This exercise demonstrates a common method. for Name. for File name. 1 In the Project Browser.xls. This process may vary from system to system. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click Modify. click Training Files. 3 In Microsoft Excel.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 Save the file. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 4 Under Printer.Unit 18. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.JPG. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click Desktop.mdi. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type Fixture Schedule.rvt.

as well as a large lab building. or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 371 . To effectively document this project. you break up the plan into sections. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. The large floor plan. called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson.

for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. right-click Dependent on Level 2.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 4 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2.Aviary. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 6 In the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the drawing area. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The dependent view opens. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 2 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. under Level 2. and click Rename. and click OK.

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .

and click Rename. 12 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser.10 Click in the drawing area. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . enter Level 2 . 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and on the Zoom flyout. 15 Select the crop region.Labs. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. for Name. right-click Level 2. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Zoom flyout.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click Matchline. 19 On the View Control Bar. 20 Click in the drawing area. click (Hide Crop Region).

Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and click. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 24 On the Design Bar. Click above the left corner of the lab building.

31 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Floor Plans. click Level 2 . Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. for Line Weight. 33 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . enter Level 2 Aviary. and click Rename. and click OK. right-click A101 .Unnamed. for Name. select Double Dash. expand Sheets. and click OK.Aviary. select 9. 28 For Line Pattern.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Under Matchline. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click View Reference. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. for Target view. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. double-click Level 2. 39 On the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Labs dependent view on the sheet. and place the Level 2 . under Floor Plans.Aviary is selected. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Modify.Labs. click Zoom To Fit. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . for Target view. 44 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Zoom flyout.

click the far right control. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.46 In the Project Browser. click (Show Crop Region). 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area.Aviary. after modifying the annotation crop region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. double-click Level 2 . NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 49 If. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. 48 Select the crop region. right-click. 47 On the View Control Bar.

click Zoom To Fit. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region).50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 51 On the View Control Bar. and click Apply Dependent Views. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. expand Level 1. right-click Level 2. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. select all views in the list. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. under Floor Plans. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 54 In the Project Browser. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. and click OK. 52 In the Project Browser.

you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.57 On the Zoom flyout. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click South Elevation. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The matchline is already placed in the view. click Zoom To Fit. and double-click South Elevation.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 2 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

7 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. cropping the view to the lab building. cropping the view to the aviary.Left. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. enter South Elevation . and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.Right. 11 Select the crop region. expand South Elevation. enter South Elevation . 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 5 In the drawing area. right-click South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). for Name. 8 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and drag it toward the center of the view. for Name. select the Crop Region. and click Rename. 9 In the Project Browser.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

rvt. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. The perspective view displays. click Camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. under Floor Plans. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. in the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. and select the crop boundary. and adjust the field of vision. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Depending on camera placement. With the camera shown. as necessary. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. right-click 3D View 1. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . If the camera is not shown in the view. as shown.3 Zoom out. double-click Site. the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

enter Exterior . 10 Save the file.6 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click Rename. under 3D Views.Day. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day to open the view. double-click Exterior . right-click 3D View 1. 8 In the Project Browser.

double-click Exterior .Day. You then duplicate the view. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. under 3D Views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. modify render settings.rvt. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 .Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. and render a daytime view of the exterior.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click OK twice. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. select Edit/New. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. enter Spring Equinox . The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. select Sky: Cloudy. NOTE If a background image is required. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. In this case. You create a location and time for the rendering. 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Medium. under Lighting. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 3pm. and click Render. for Sun. click (Show Rendering Dialog). for Setting. 5 In the Rename dialog. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. 8 Under Quality. for New.Santa Monica. under Background. select Spring Equinox. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. You adjust cloud settings as required.

Click Save. click Show the rendering. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.png). Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. After the image is rendered.9 In the Rendering dialog. click Export. 10 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. select Portable Network Graphics (*. For Files of type. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 .

under 3D Views. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. click OK. 27 In the Rendering dialog. and select the last light. 16 With the Exterior . on the View Control Bar. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Group Options. 21 In the Light Groups dialog.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser.Night view open. dialog. for Scheme. click New. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . you duplicate the view and change the settings. press and hold SHIFT.120V.120V to the Pool Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . select the first light. under Ungrouped Lights. click Render. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . right-click Exterior .Night. 22 Using the same method. for Name. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. To select a sequential list.Day. enter Pool Lights. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. under Lighting. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.Flat Round : 60W . verify that Pool Lights is selected. and click OK. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only. 25 Using the same method.Day view to Exterior .120V through 35 :Sconce Light . 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Artificial Lights. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . click New.Flat Round : 60W . 24 In the New Light Group dialog.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. and click OK.Night.Exterior . add 30 :Sconce Light . and click Move to Group. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. under Group Options. enter Pool House Lights. click Dialog). for Name.

Rendering an Interior View on page 411. click Show the model.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. In this example. enter 4. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. you change the brightness of the exposure. under Image. 32 Save the file. and click OK. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. click Adjust Exposure. for Exposure Value. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . After the image is rendered. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 30 In the Rendering dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.

Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.rvt. render the views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. define the perspective view and rendering settings.

and on the Edit toolbar. Adding RPC People | 413 . double-click Level 1. click Component. and place the component inside the pool house. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. select RPC Female : YinYin. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the figure. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. the person’s line of sight.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. ■ (Rotate).

13 On the Design Bar.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 14 Save the file. In order to see the figure’s reflection. under Parameters. 12 Click OK 3 times. By default. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Modify. click Edit. select Cast Reflections. on the Options Bar. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. click (Element Properties). for Render Appearance Properties. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. you can enable this option. click Edit/New. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. click Camera.rvt. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.

6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. and click OK. and click Properties. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.The perspective view displays. right-click 3D View 1. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents.

9 In the Project Browser. select the section box. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . under Elevations (Building Elevations). 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 11 In the 3D view. under Floor Plans. double-click South. In order to accurately adjust the section box. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. in addition to the 3D view. double-click Level 1.

size the box as shown. right-click. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 14 In the 3D view. select the section box. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view.

16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and curtain walls. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . and render the interior view. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. doors that contain windows or glass. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 17 Save the file.

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Setting. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option.rvt. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. under Lighting. select Interior: Artificial only. you turn them off for this scene. clear Pool Lights. enter Interior . 3 On the View Control Bar. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. click Render. and click OK. and click Rename. 5 Click Artificial Lights. under 3D Views. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 7 Under Quality.Night. After these settings are established. c_Pool_House_in_progress. for Scheme. 4 In the Rendering dialog. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 8 In the Rendering dialog. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. select Draft. and click OK. You can specify a lower quality. 2 In the Rename View dialog.

NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. select Interior: Sun only. for Scheme. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. in order to turn on daylight portals. right-click Interior . click 14 For Setting. In this case. you must create a custom setting. The preset schemes are read-only. but the space will receive standard daylighting. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.9 Close the Rendering dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Curtain Walls. (Show Rendering Dialog). click Copy To Custom. for Sun. and click OK. 3pm. By default they are turned off. the daylight portals can be turned on. 17 In the Rendering dialog. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times.Day. and click Render.Night. For sunlit interiors. for Daylight Portal Options. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Edit. select Region. select Spring Equinox . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.Santa Monica. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. For more information on daylight portals. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. You create a view for the interior during the day. 13 In the Rendering dialog.

In the next steps. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. enter 10. under Image. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. For Saturation. select the column on the right. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. click Show the model. and close the Rendering dialog. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. enter 1. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Adjust Exposure.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Properties). 20 In the Rendering dialog.

For Rotate.22 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. for Resolution. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. and click OK. 28 In the Rendering dialog. select Unfinished. For Width. clear Region. select Wood. select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size. and on the Options Bar. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. enter 90.6. 24 In the Materials dialog. For Bump. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. the render time increases significantly. For Amount. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. Click OK. enter 5''. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. add a bump map to create texture. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. select Scale (locked proportions). 23 With the column still selected. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. click (Show Rendering Dialog). As size and DPI are increased. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Based on wood grain. and click Render. select Printer. under Output Settings. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 30 In the drawing area. You change the varnish setting. select High. for Setting. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . click OK.

The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. elevation. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. or section view.The rendered image displays. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. In a plan view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Usually.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Walkthrough. and click the tab in the context menu.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. and ends in the far corner of the living room. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. on the Options Bar. and double-click 1st Floor. expand Floor Plans. and change unit formats as desired. expand Views (all). you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Townhouse. right-click in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Training Files. proceeds through the dining room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. verify that Perspective is selected. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.

expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish.

8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. enter 16''. on the Options Bar. enter 9''. 13 On the Options Bar. and for Height. 12 On the View menu. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. select the crop boundary. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. click Edit Walkthrough. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. and select the crop boundary. for Frame. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size. 17 Click . and click OK. If it is not. verify that Field of view is selected. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 14 Click . and click OK. enter 1. for Width. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 11 Under Change. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame).

The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.The walkthrough plays. under Floor Plans. click Edit Walkthrough. click (Element Properties). The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. clear Far Clip Active. press ESC. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. proceed to the next exercise. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

You can move any camera target or key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. 7 Click the third key frame position. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and drag it to the location shown. 6 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 .

9 To play the walkthrough. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. click Edit Walkthrough. shading with edges. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Compressor. under Output Length. and click OK. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. select <Shading>. c_Townhouse. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. on the Options Bar. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. . 3 Under Format. and click OK. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. The walkthrough is recorded. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 5 In the Video Compression dialog.rvt. enter 15. double-click Walkthrough 1. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and save the exercise file with a unique name. hidden line. 8 If you want to save this exercise. or rendering. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. under Walkthroughs. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save As. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. for Frames/sec. for Model Graphics Style. shading. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . When you export the walkthrough. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. specifying the number of frames. reducing the size of the image. If you are unsure of what option to use.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.

In this tutorial. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. 431 . ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.

Courtyard View In this exercise. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. 4 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. and double-click 01 Entry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Solar Study . click shown. expand Views (all). click Camera. (SteeringWheels). as shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A 3D view is created. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

if necessary. expand 3D Views. click Section. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.Courtyard View. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. you create a section cutaway view. 7 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry. as shown. 3 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the File menu. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. right-click 3D View 1. enter Solar Study . 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. click Save As.5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Modify.

as shown. and click Rename. 13 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. double-click the section head. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). expand Sections. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. click 10 On the View toolbar. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. right-click Section 1. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 7 In the Project Browser. 6 To view the section. click . click Modify. 11 On the SteeringWheel.

right-click Callout of 01 Entry. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 17 To hide the section box. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. and click OK. do not display many elements in 3D. click Save. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway.14 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. In some cases. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. and click OK. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. and click Rename. 18 On the File menu. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 16 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. clear Section Boxes. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . under Floor Plans. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click 01 Entry. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. including the house. then Fine. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. Typical plan views. 6 In the Rename View dialog. then select Medium. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click . click Callout. you create a plan cutaway view.

as shown. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 15 Select the Roof. 9 On the SteeringWheel.8 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. so you can see into the building from the top. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. as shown. click (SteeringWheels). 11 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click Modify.

The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. under 3D Views. and click Rename. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click OK.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 18 In the Project Browser. click Save. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 21 On the File menu. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. right-click {3D}. 20 On the View Control Bar. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . and preview the effects of each study as an animation.17 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

and time.Creating Solar Studies . select Los Angeles. leave the slider at 50.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. or multi-day solar study. 10 Under Place. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. CA. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. single-day. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. click click OK. You can create a still. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. for City. and click OK. you specify the location. 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. and time range. 3 Select Cast Shadows.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. For the Single-Day solar study. For the Multi-Day solar study. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. Los Angeles. and click Duplicate. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Views (all). 9 In the Name dialog. click . 4 For Sun Position. For this study. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. . expand 3D Views.Boston. date range. enter Summer Solstice. date. MA. USA is selected. USA. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. click . you specify the location.

2008. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Duplicate.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 6 On the View Control Bar. ■ For Time Interval. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. select June 22. on the Single-Day tab. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles is selected. enter 10 and press ENTER. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . confirm that Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. select Winter Solstice. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 16 In the Name dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 14 In this case. Under Frame. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. For Time Range. enter 20 and press ENTER. click . Los Angeles. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click Save. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. select December 22. Los Angeles. 7 On the Options Bar. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Date. 2008. 19 On the File menu. enter Winter Solstice. under Frame. for Sun Position. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. under Floor Plans. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Los Angeles. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The solar study animation plays. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. approximately as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 13 On the View Control Bar. click . for Sun Position. on the Single-Day tab. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. click . . 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click To play the animation from start to finish. . double-click 01 Entry. click . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. select Summer Solstice.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click Text. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file.■ To display the next key frame. and click OK. click To display the next sequential frame. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . 8 For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. On the Options Bar. click . verify that Cast Shadows is selected. approximately as shown. Click and enter Dining. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. expand 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click Lines. as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout.

17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select the section box. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and enter 5 to 50. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. clear Section Boxes. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. as shown. On the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. under Output Length. if necessary. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. select Frame Range. select Section Boxes. 15 To hide the section box. Los Angeles. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select Summer Solstice. ■ For Frames per second. click OK. 12 In the drawing area.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 14 Click outside of the section box. 11 To display the section box.

and click OK. For Frames per second. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that the value is set to 15. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. For Files of Type. on the Single-Day tab. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. you open each image. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. For Dimensions. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. enter 450 in the first field (width). for Model Graphics Style. select Winter Solstice. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. To view the animation. for Compressor. under Output Length. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected.Los Angeles. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. or frame. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . Los Angeles. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For File Name. of the animation separately. and click OK. 3 For Sun Position. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. select AVI Files. Under Format. for Model Graphics Style. and enter 5 to 10. click OK. select Frame Range. To maintain the proportions of the frame.■ ■ Under Format. Click OK.

you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. In this example. BMP. TIFF. click the Desktop icon. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. For File name.■ For Dimensions.Los Angeles. depending on the Frame Range. 8 Click Save. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. under 3D Views. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . enter 450 in the first field (width). the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. as shown: 9 On the File menu. click Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For Files of Type. such as JPEG. Click OK. or GIF. or any single-frame format. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select PNG.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

for Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Los Angeles . 12 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click OK. and click OK. click the Multi-Day tab. click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. and on the View Control Bar. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. USA. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Duplicate. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. specify 2:00 pm. for File name enter 2pm . For Time Interval. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Boston. On the Annotation Categories tab. For Time. clear Section Boxes. 5 Select the roof. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. MA. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 8 On the View Control Bar. select One week.Week Interval.

South. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click OK. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Click the Desktop icon. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. 17 On the View Control Bar. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and annotations in non-drafting views.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. model views. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. such as East . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. When you mirror a project. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. you mirror all model elements. for File Name. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). In the Length/Format dialog. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.West or North . and click Save. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. for Compressor. double-click 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. select the roof. select East . 2 In the drawing area. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. and click OK. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. For additional information. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help.West. Then. 5 In the warning dialog. In this exercise. right-click.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 6 On the Standard toolbar.West axis. The project is mirrored along the East . View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. click OK.

click the Still tab. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 8 For Sun Position. specify 11:00 AM for time. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. click . on the Still tab. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. 10 Under Date and Time. 5 For Sun Position. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Apply. click .3 On the View Control Bar. 11 For Sun Position. Orienting to True North | 449 . you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. For example. click . 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 Under Date and Time.

click OK. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. the view settings must be set for True North. click OK. under Floor Plans. click . Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 18 In the Project Browser. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. and select Winter Solstice. This process establishes the view setting to True North. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. and click OK. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry. select True North. for Orientation. 14 On the View Control Bar. right click 01 Entry. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. click the Still tab. When a project is started. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 15 For Sun Position. and click Properties.

■ To establish the new direction of True North. as shown. click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view.■ To establish the True North direction. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. Orienting to True North | 451 .

and click OK. right-click 01 Entry. 33 For Sun Position. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.23 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. right-click. select Summer Solstice. and click Properties. and click Rename. and click OK. select True North Orientation. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. click . right-click 01 Entry. right-click. 32 On the View Control Bar. for Orientation. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. enter True North Orientation. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. and click OK. select Project North. and click Apply. for Orientation. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Project Browser. select True North. and click Element Properties. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Rename View dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 25 In the Project Browser. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

under Format. Click Save. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Dimensions. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for Compressor. and click OK. Orienting to True North | 453 . enter 600 in the first field. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. verify that AVI Files is selected. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click Summer Solstice. click OK. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Desktop icon. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For File Name. Los Angeles. For Files of Type. In the Length/Format dialog. Click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Single-Day tab. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK.

select Winter Solstice.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Scheme. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. capturing it. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. under Quality. 2 In the Project Browser. for Setting. and exporting it as a JPEG image. In this exercise. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. select Interior: Sun only. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. under Settings. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. select 12/22. click Render. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the View Control Bar. and 2:00 PM. select Medium. and click Duplicate. select Edit/New. under 3D Views. for Date and Time. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. Rendered views do not have this limitation. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click OK. For Sun. In the Name dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Since a rendered image is temporary. Under Lighting. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.

Rendering an Interior View | 455 . so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 In the Rendering dialog. click Export. For Files of type. verify that JPEG Files is selected. and click Save. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. click Desktop. click Save to Project. and click OK. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.

456 .

Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. 457 . You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. They include rendering. length. Co-house. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. In this series of exercises. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. elevations. advanced model graphics. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. type. you explore the stylistic approach. however. linework. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Using the pre-built building model. an outside reviewer. For the realistic approach. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. and details. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. or the client. Whether the audience is the general contractor. When organizing presentation graphics. you can choose between realism and stylistics. a consultant. Other tools in the software. sections. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. and section boxes. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a presentation floor plan.

right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click Rename.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click in the drawing area.rvt. under Floor Plans. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Cnst. 2 In the Project Browser. exit the menu. right-click 2nd Flr. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

6 Click the Model Categories tab. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. and Up Arrow. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. sections. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . expand the Stairs category. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. No annotations display in the view. and other annotations in this view. 7 Under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all tags. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. UP Text. and clear DOWN Text. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Down Arrow. elevations. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 8 Click OK.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab. dimensions.rvt. this represents the view getting smaller. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 11 In the Save As directory. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and click Save.

click (Shadows Off). The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and select 1st Flr. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. modify. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. specify 10/27. however. ■ For Contrast. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . click the Place tab. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 9 For City. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. Time and Place. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click it in the Project Browser. Within a project. MA. and click OK. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. NOTE For this step. you can select any city. select Sun and Shadow Settings. specify 35. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 1:00 PM. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 Under Settings. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. click .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. for Date and Time. select Boston. 7 For Place. you can create. For Sun Position. If you select a different city. 3 On the View Control Bar. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. select Cast Shadows. the darker the shadows. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.rvt. 2 On the View Control Bar. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The higher the number. At that place. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 12 Click OK. select By Date. Cnst. on the Still tab.

This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. clear Ground Plane at Level. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. . 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Shadows On). This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. for Sun Position. and click OK.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Settings.

The viewport displays at the cursor. 6 On the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click to place it. click Add View. right-click the Design Bar. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. select Arch Portrait. and notice the view title. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Sheet. 4 In the Views dialog. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and click View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport.

Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. select No. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. under Graphics. click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Name dialog. enter Presentation. and click OK. for Show Title. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. The viewport no longer displays a view title. click Edit/New. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . and click OK. To accomplish this. For this analytique. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Duplicate. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

17 In the Type Selector. and the boundary of the region. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Filled Region. If necessary. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. click Region Properties. click Edit/New. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 18 On the Options Bar. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 20 On the Options Bar. click . click . select Invisible lines. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. fill properties. and select Chain. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 22 On the Design Bar. When you finish drawing the chain. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown.

click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 25 In the Name dialog. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Solid fill. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. enter Solid Black. click . and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. click Duplicate. scroll down. under Name. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. under Graphics. for Sheet Name. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466.24 In the Type Properties dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 30 On the Design Bar. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. enter Presentation. and click View Properties.

you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. right-click South. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

click Duplicate. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Pattern Overrides. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. scroll up. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Elevations. select Cast Shadows. 13 For Contrast. under Visibility. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. specify 2:30 PM. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. and click OK. 14 For Sun Position. click in the drawing area. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 12 Under Shadow. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click Copy of South. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 For Time. By changing the angle of the sun. click Override. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. specify 35. and clear Elevation Swing.2 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select By Date. 16 In the Name dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Shadows Off). enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. click . Time and Place. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Visible. and click Rename. expand the Doors category. exit the menu. 9 Click OK. under Settings. on the Model Categories tab. click in the Walls row. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar.

you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). click Add View. double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.Presentation. 3 In the Views dialog.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.rvt. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

The view title no longer displays. select Viewport : Presentation. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. click Modify.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.

rvt. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the section shown below. double-click 1st Flr. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. for Scale.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. click Section. select 1: 100. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.

6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. as shown. To fit correctly in the analytique. 7 On the Options Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 100. click Callout. expand Sections (Callout 1). Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. To accomplish this.Section 2 is added to the building model. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. and double-click Section 2. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . this view needs to be rotated 180°.

and click OK. click the Model Categories tab. under Sections (Callout 1). under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Override. right-click Callout of Section 2. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 17 Under Visibility. click in the Walls row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Section 2. clear Visible. scroll up. 10 In the Project Browser. and clear Elevation Swing. and click Rename. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand the Doors category. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 15 Under Visibility. click Modify. 12 In the Project Browser.

The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. click The crop regions no longer display. 22 On the View Control Bar. When you select the crop region. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 20 Click OK. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. (Hide Crop Region). Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

Click Apply.rvt. in the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. 3 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: Under Shadow. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ For Sun Position. 6 In the Name dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate. and click OK. In the steps that follow. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Contrast. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View Control Bar. click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. The shadows do not offer much contrast.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 35. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. In addition.

select Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Silhouette Edges. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. select Directly. NOTE The line style. Click OK. and click OK. specify 135°. for Silhouette style. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Azimuth. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . click OK. Select Relative to View. click (Shadows On). specify 70°. was added to this training file for training purposes. and click Advanced Model Graphics. For Altitude. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. under Sheets (all).Presentation. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click A105 . click Add View. 3 In the Views dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 2. and click to place the selected view. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Add View to Sheet.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

The section needs to be rotated 180°. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. click (Rotate). enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. The view title no longer displays. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . under Sections (Callout 1).5 In the Type Selector. and press Enter. select Viewport : Presentation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. Using a clock as a reference. double-click Section 2. click Modify. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. To rotate an object. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. In the steps that follow. you click to specify the start radius. 6 On the Design Bar.

double-click A105 . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. under Sheets (all). 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.The callout rotates 180°.

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. After applying the view template to a new section view. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. and drag it up and to the left as shown. click Modify. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 On the Design Bar.

rvt. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. enter Presentation Section 1. and click Rename. you can simply apply the presentation view template.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Copy of Section 1. 3 In the New View Template dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Type 1). Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation. click OK. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. right-click Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog.

select Viewport : Presentation. under Names. for Rotation on Sheet. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. annotations. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. select 90° Counterclockwise. under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . 13 Place it to the left of the plan view.Presentation. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. lighting fixtures. under Graphics.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Section: Presentation Section 1. The furniture. click Add View. and click Activate View. and click OK. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and elevation swings no longer display. 15 Right-click the viewport. select Presentation. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click A105 . 12 In the Views dialog.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. In this exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as a tracery window or a column capital. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. traditional analytiques contain a detail.

4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Modify. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 1. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. select the callout.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Callout.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. After you add the callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . double-click Section 1. as shown. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Type 1).

double-click Presentation Callout. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 7 Select the crop region. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 In the Project Browser. as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. and click View Properties. enter Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Annotation Crop. 8 Right-click. and click OK.5 In the Rename View dialog.

select Viewport : Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Activate View. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . For Scale Value 1.Presentation. Click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. specify 22. click Add View. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom. under Sheets (all).

and click Deactivate View. and make adjustments as necessary. activate the viewport. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. When finished. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. click Region Properties. and move it to the position shown below. click Filled Region. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. The composition set for the analytique is now complete.19 Right-click the callout presentation view.

26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select Solid fill.Presentation. for Fill Pattern. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. click Finish Sketch. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 28 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). click Filled Region. When you are finished. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once.25 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK 3 times. on the Design Bar. click . and click Activate View.

31 On the Options Bar. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 34 Select the crop region. 33 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the Design Bar. click . and sketch the rectangle shown below. click Finish Sketch. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click (Show Crop Region).

38 Proceed with the next lesson. click (Hide Crop Region).35 On the View Control Bar. and click Deactivate View. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

and click 1 : 200. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. under 3D Views. click (Shadows Off). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Scale control. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 On the View Control Bar.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and apply shadows to the views.rvt. 3 On the View Control Bar.

enter Isometric 1. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. select Cast Shadows. in the list. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. For Contrast. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Duplicate. and click Rename. select Silhouette Edges. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click Isometric. For Sun Position. under 3D Views. A section box displays around the building model. enter Isometric 2. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. For Azimuth. select Directly. specify 135°. and click Rename. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . 8 In the Name dialog. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. click . For Altitude. for Silhouette style. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. select Section Box. specify 35. 12 In the Rename View dialog. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. Select Relative to View. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 In the Project Browser. Select 1st Flr. Click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK. Cnst. and click OK. specify 45°. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Isometric 2. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK.

You can use this to rotate the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor.19 Select the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. as shown. Grips display on each face of the section box.

under 3D Views. 29 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 31 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. When you are finished. 24 In the Project Browser. you can adjust the plane location. and click Rename. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. make a copy of the view. and click OK. 23 In the Rename View dialog. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. under Sheets (all). right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 25 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click Isometric 2. double-click A105 . and click OK. 27 Select the section box.Presentation. The section box no longer displays. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Isometric 3. select Viewport : Presentation. the stairs and railings may display. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Next. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . 22 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter Isometric 3. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 21 In the Project Browser. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. If desired.

32 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. The filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. 33 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector.

click Edit/New. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 For Background. 40 Click OK twice. 36 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . This will make it easier to draw lines. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. 41 On the Design Bar. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. select Transparent. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Region Properties. for Fill Patterns.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Concrete. click Edit. and click Activate View. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. On the Options Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1.

47 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Finish Sketch. 46 Click OK twice.43 On the Design Bar. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. select Solid fill. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Fill Pattern. and click Deactivate View. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Region Properties.

you add it to the presentation sheet. The view opens immediately. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. under Floor Plans. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. then you specify the eye direction and range.rvt.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Cnst. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr. you create the final view for the analytique. a cutaway perspective view. click Camera.

For Sun Position. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. For Contrast. and click OK. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify the following: Under Shadow.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. for Name. for Silhouette style. click . 6 On the View Control Bar. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). specify 35. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges.

Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. select Section Box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK. under Extents. 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Grips display on each plane of the section box.

21 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet.14 Select the crop region. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. select Viewport : Presentation. select Scale (locked proportions). Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. On the Annotation Categories tab. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Sheets (all). enter 165 mm. for Width. clear Section Boxes. 19 To hide the section box. click Size.Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Change. Because scale does not apply to perspective views.

select a font. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. specify a text size of 40 mm. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select Text : Title. click . 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. double-click it in the Project Browser.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 In the Name dialog. under Text. specify a text size of 6 mm. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 10 In the Name dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Duplicate. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK. enter Description. under Text. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise.Presentation sheet is not the active view. enter Title. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the same font as the title. click Text. click Duplicate. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . Annotating the Analytique on page 503. and click OK. click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector.

select Text : Description. 16 In the Type Selector. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 18 On the Design Bar.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

After you import the SketchUp model. In this tutorial. such as walls. and roofs. you create a small building from the front mass form.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. Once the model has been imported. curtain walls. 507 . You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. that compose the building. you can easily add detail with Revit components.

right-click in the Design Bar. select SketchUp Files. For Import units. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. and click Save. enter SketchUp Model. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. Click the Sketchup file. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. click OK. and click OK. For Layers. click Browse. select Preserve. For Files of type. select Auto-Detect. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 2 In the New Project dialog. buildings. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. For Colors. click the Massing tab. visible elements.skp. you create a Revit Architecture project. click Create Mass.rte. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click OK. enter Import SketchUp. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 10 In the Name dialog. Double-click the Common folder. select All.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 9 In the informational dialog. click Training Files. 4 In the New Project dialog. and not in the library. 6 In the Save As dialog. under Template file. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. or select from a list. for File name. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

click Finish Mass. 17 In the warning dialog. Level 1 is the only choice. click the Close button. and roofs. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . For Place at level. Click Open. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from.Center. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. select Manual . such as walls. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. 16 On the Design Bar. click . The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. 14 On the View toolbar. In a new project.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. curtain walls. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. ■ ■ For Positioning. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. depending on the complexity of the project. select Level 1.

Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. verify Level 2 is selected. and roofs. After you create the building from the mass faces. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and when the cursor displays a plus sign.400mm displays. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. click Roof by Face. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. for Level. such as walls. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 3 In the Type Selector. and on the View Control Bar. verify Basic Roof: Generic . You turn their visibility off to view only the building. select the face so that it highlights in red. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. curtain walls. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. that compose the building. 4 On the Options Bar.

Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. click to display masses. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 9 On the Options Bar. To see the new roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. on the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

click Roof by Face. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 12 On the Design Bar.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

click Wall by Face.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.200mm displays. 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click roofs that you created. for Loc Line. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 22 In the Type Selector.

29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face. 25 On the View toolbar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 28 In the Type Selector. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar.

Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. 31 Using the same technique. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . create the 2 curtain systems shown below.30 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.

40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. and select it. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Wall by Face. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.35 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . select the other wall. click Create Roof. and on the Options Bar. click Curtain System. click Create System.

and select the mass face shown below. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 42 On the View toolbar.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . double-click Level 1. click Camera. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. click to view the building that you have created. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. Below the right corner of the view. specify a point to place the camera. under Floor Plans.

■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. click your building in the view. as shown. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. The perspective view created by the camera displays. to view only the walls. 48 On the View toolbar. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . specify a point for the camera target. Click the frame to display its grips. roofs. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.

Click OK. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. 50 On the Options Bar. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . for Justification. Under Grid 2 Pattern.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. select Center. select Center. and select the left curtain system in the view. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click . Under Grid 1 Pattern. click Modify.

and move the roof edges as shown below.54 Select each roof to display its grips. double-click {3D}. 59 On the View toolbar. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 63 In the Type Selector. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. click Door. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . under 3D Views. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. under 3D Views. and click Cancel to end the command. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 55 Right-click. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click 3D View 1. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 56 In the Project Browser.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

you need to select a panel. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. For example. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. or you can use a specific curtain system command. grid lines. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Like windows. you create a curtain system using the wall command. panel. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. 525 . you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This affects the entire curtain system. to resize the system. and they are not windows. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. To change grids. you select the grid. and you can change these elements individually. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. To switch panel types. you need to change the length of the wall. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and mullions. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Unlike windows. Like walls.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls.

click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. and double-click Ground Floor.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. click Wall.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 527 .7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. Click OK. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . top constraint.11 Select the curtain system. using curtain grids. For Top Offset. enter 1200. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. and click (Properties). you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. and room bounding. top and base attachments.

double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click Rename. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.a. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Modify. click Curtain Grid.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. right-click Elevation 1 . under Floor Plans. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 25 On the Design Bar. click Elevation. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

THIRD FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. click Modify. Click to place another grid line. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select SECOND FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.26 While pressing CTRL. FOURTH FLOOR. while pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 33 On the Design Bar. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. one larger than the other. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. and click OK. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Curtain Grid. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and SEVENTH FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Click to create a vertical grid.

You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. The segment line style changes to dashed. click Add or Remove Segments. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. Creating an Entrance | 531 . and on the Options Bar. Instead of using the Door command. and then select the segment above it. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. The two segments are removed. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system.Next. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.

42 Place dimensions as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. click Curtain Grid.38 Using the same method. select One Segment. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them. 40 On the Options Bar.

click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Creating an Entrance | 533 . Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. Use the following image as a guide. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 43 Delete the dimensions. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. click in any white space to exit the editor. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids.

534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . These panels schedule as doors. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. under Elevations. double-click Entrance Elevation. 55 In the Project Browser. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. They are part of the curtain panel category. Now. click Modify. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 54 On the Design Bar. The panel changes to a double door. under Floor Plans. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This changes the graphics style of the Next. click Training Files. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 57 On the View Control Bar. not as curtain panels. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. and click Wireframe. 56 In the Project Browser.Next. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. . 52 On the Type Selector. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click view.rfa. on the new curtain system you added.

The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The glazed panels display in blue. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels.60 On the Type Selector. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 61 With the panel still selected. 63 Click OK twice. 65 On the View Control Bar. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click System Panel : Solid.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids.68 On the File menu. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Save As.rvt. select Grid Line Segment. 4 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. select Entire Grid Line. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Mullion.

9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. however. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary.6 On the Options Bar. clickModify. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. there are a few that you do not want. 10 Delete the mullions below them. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . select All Empty Segments. so you remove them next.

click Modify. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. double-click Southeast Isometric. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. you can also right-click. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 16 In the Project Browser. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the top mullion control. Finally. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .Two mullion join controls display. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 17 Save the file.

Click OK. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Curved Curtain System | 539 . under Floor Plans. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. (Arc passing through three points).Curved Curtain System In this lesson. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. For Top Offset. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. for Top Constraint. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1200. Finally. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. you add a curtain system using the wall command. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. click Wall.

540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . eighths. and then sixteenths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Divide the halves into quarters. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Next. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. double-click East. under Elevations. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. click Curtain Grid. you place grids on the system.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc.

to filter out all 19 Save the file.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. select the bottom layer of panels. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 18 In the Type Selector.300mm. Next. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels.

under Elevations. . 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. click Model Lines. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click Exterior. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. 9 Select the extrusion. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click . and on the Options Bar.rft. for Depth. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 3 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. clear Chain.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click . for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 11 On the Design Bar. enter 100. select Glass.

and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.Pattern.14 On the Design Bar. and click Change Walls Orientation.rfa family. All fourth floor panels are selected. 23 Right-click. (SteeringWheels). 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 24 On the View toolbar. 18 Load the Curtain Panel .Pattern. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and save the family as Curtain Panel . click Modify.rfa. right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 In the Type Selector. and return to the project file. under Floor Plans. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click (Default 3D View). select Curtain Panel . click 25 On the View toolbar.Pattern. 19 In the Project Browser.

The finished arc wall should look like the following image.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 27 In the Project Browser. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. under Floor Plans. 30 Save the file. All the panels change to the solid panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. select System Panel . All fifth floor panels are selected. right-click. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 29 In the Type Selector. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel.Solid.

1 In the Project Browser. select Mullion. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click Lines. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Click again to specify the ending point. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. enter 8. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and click OK. double-click East.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. for Profile Usage. under Elevations. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).rft. For vertical mullions. and select it. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Select Radius. click ■ ■ For Sides. click Training Files. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. . If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Mullion.

31 Click . click Training Files. After the new profile is loaded. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. clear Fine. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. clear Coarse and Medium. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under 3D Views. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.detail. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . click (SteeringWheels). and return to the project file. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. click Visibility.rfa. 20 Select the detail component. click Detail Component. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Modify.rfa.rfa family.11 On the Design Bar. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Mullion. click Modify. it can be added as a mullion type. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 13 On the Options Bar. and click Visibility. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and click OK. 27 In the Project Browser. 28 On the View toolbar.

34 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 On the Design Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. select Circular Mullion for Family. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 41 In the Project Browser. select All Empty Segments. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. click Duplicate. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 43 Press DELETE. 33 Click Edit/New. 36 Under Construction. right-click. for Profile. so you remove the unwanted ones. and click OK. You have placed more mullions than you want. 38 On the Options Bar. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK twice. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 44 Save the file.

2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. and you can click to select them all. and a ruled curtain system. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. a storefront system. 1 In the Project Browser. All the inside faces highlight. double-click TOP OF ROOF. select Defines slope. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. under Floor Plans. In this lesson. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and then apply those custom elements to the system. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. click Pick Walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system. TIP To chain select all the walls. and press TAB. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system.

click Roof Properties. Click OK. click Mullion. 14 On the Options Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 17 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. select Entire Grid Line. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. enter 600. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Modify. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 18 Save the file.7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. double-click Southeast Isometric.

and enter 2400. 1 In the Project Browser. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. click Wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Storefront System In this exercise. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. select Unconnected for Height. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. enter 10200 mm. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 9 On the Design Bar. which is specified in the type. 12 Select the storefront wall. To see how the grid layout is defined. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. double-click Southeast Isometric. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. click Edit/New. even if the wall height changes. This specifies an exact length for the wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click .7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. For this wall. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Storefront System | 551 . and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. under 3D Views.

1 In the Project Browser. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 16 Click OK. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. and Offset. Justification. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. enter 15. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. or end. By setting the Angle value. center. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. click Mullion. 19 Select a curtain grid. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 18 On the Options Bar. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. In this exercise. you find Number. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 20 Save the file. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. double-click Southeast Isometric. Angle. under 3D Views.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. see the Revit Architecture help. select All Empty Segments. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning.

click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 6 Click the highlighted line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and highlight the model line.3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line.

click Curtain Grid.8 Select the highlighted line. Next. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. and click . you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 10 Select the panel.

and then eighths. and define a ruled curtain system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. quarters.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. quarters. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 18 Save the file. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. Finally. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and then eighths. select System Panel : Solid. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 16 In the Type Selector. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves.

556 .

you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. and low sloped roofs. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Before you can sketch the roof profile. gable.Roofs 15 In this lesson. In this lesson. and soffits to the roofs that you create. shed. In this tutorial. gutters. In this exercise. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. 557 . Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. mansard. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn how to add fascia. you learn to create several different types of roofs. including hip. In addition.

558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and so on). 5 In the Go To View dialog. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 4 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click Training Files. and click OK. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. expand Views (all). select Name.rvt. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Ref Plane. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and open Metric\m_Roofs. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. centerline. click the blue square on the witness line. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 16 On the View toolbar. select Chain. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Next. click Lines. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. The roof should resemble the following illustration. expand Sections (Type 1). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. expand Views (all). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and double-click Section 1. and select the second wall.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. click Modify. and then select the exterior face of the wall. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 18 Select the edge of the roof. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. press TAB. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 21 In the Project Browser. press CTRL. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. Next. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 17 On the Tools toolbar.

click model.24 On the Options Bar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. 26 On the View toolbar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Garage Roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . and click Yes. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and enter 600 for Overhang.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Views (all). 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 5 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs.rvt. Next. click Pick Walls. sketch the roof footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. 3 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click the model. 15 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Dimensions. click Finish Roof. 11 Press CTRL. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. By default. 14 When you see the informational dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. clear Defines slope. click Modify. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. and click OK. select both slope definition lines. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click (Properties).

you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. expand Floor Plans.rvt. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . and double-click Level 3. 3 On the Options Bar. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and enter 600 for Overhang. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. clear Defines slope. When you complete the roof. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 Click to select all the walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options bar. sketch the chimney opening. 10 On the View menu. click (Rectangle). select Defines Slope. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Lines. select Defines Slope. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Finish Roof. click Modify. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 17 When you see the informational dialog.

19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.18 On the View toolbar. select Defines slope. m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.rvt. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. and enter 600 for Overhang. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 .

and click (Pick Lines). 11 To trim the first line segment. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Next. 10 On the Options Bar.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click Lines. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. using the following illustration for guidance. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . close the roof sketch. clear Defines Slope. Next. click (Trim/Extend). 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. select the left vertical slope definition line. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.

14 Under Constraints. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 18 On the Design Bar. Next.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click Roof Properties. 16 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. and click OK. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click (SteeringWheels). and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 Using the same method that you used previously.21 Click (SteeringWheels). Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Next. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof.

expand Floor Plans. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar.rvt. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Next. select the left vertical roof line. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. enter 0 for Overhang. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and enter 300 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . clear Defines Slope. 4 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. press TAB. click Pick Walls. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 10 To trim the first line segment. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. 8 On the Tools toolbar.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click (Trim/Extend).

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof Properties. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. you add a slope-defining line. click 20 On the View toolbar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. m_Roofs. expand 3D Views. (SteeringWheels). click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3D.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. expand Views (all).rvt. Next. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and press ENTER. select Defines slope. 16 Under Constraints. and click OK. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

clear Defines Slope. 3 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). Before you can add slope arrows. and double-click Level 2. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . you need to add two reference planes. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 5 On the View menu. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and enter 600 for Offset. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Slope Arrow. Next.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click Modify. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 4 In the Project Browser. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 12 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. To help locate the position of each split. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. add two new slope arrows. Next. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 9 On the Tools menu. expand Floor Plans. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. the adjacent eave heights must align. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 3 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to place the arrow. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. and double-click Garage Roof.15 to add the second slope arrow. 16 Repeat steps 13 . When eave heights differ. expand Floor Plans. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. 20 Under Dimensions. click Modify. enter 500 for Rise/1000. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 18 Press CTRL. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. m_Roofs. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. and then click OK. When you sketch a hip roof. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select both slope arrows. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Begin the tail at the right reference plane.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. select Slope for Specify. (Properties). click Edit.

Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. When aligning eaves. select a method to align the eaves. click Save As. under Dimensions. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and click OK. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Align Eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. The eave lines display with a dimension. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 If you want to save your changes. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the File menu. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. select Defines Slope. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). click Finish Roof. (Properties). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 5 On the Options Bar. Next. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 .

under Constraints. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. on the Options Bar. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (Properties). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. and double-click North. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.rvt.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 3 Select the roof and. expand Views (all). expand Elevations. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

14 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and click OK. and select the remaining three lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Finish Roof. expand Views (all). 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click Lines. click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. click Modify. click (Pick Lines). press TAB. Next. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and then select Defines slope. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar.6 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions.

(Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add a roof to a building shell. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.rvt. on the File menu. click mansard roof.17 On the View toolbar. click Save As. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. After you add the roof. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.

5 In the drawing area. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . verify that Defines slope is not selected. double-click Roof. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click Pick Walls.

580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. select Steel Truss . 11 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop.Because the walls are not continuous. for Type. click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend). 10 In the Element Properties dialog.EPDM. 7 On the Tools toolbar.Insulation on Metal Deck . and click OK. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click Roof Properties. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.

Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. In the next steps. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. double-click Roof. The roof has been created. double-click the section head to open the section view. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. click (Draw Split Lines).

add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method. and select a point on the opposite roof line.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. 23 On the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. You modify the points individually. on the Options Bar. Next. click (Modify Sub-Elements). you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. In this exercise. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. exact placement of the points is not important. (Add points).

584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . enter -2''. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. and press ENTER. click (Modify Sub-Elements). for the dimension. 25 Using the same method. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.

enter 4''.27 Press and hold CTRL. for Elevation. including the interior edges of the roof regions. and press ENTER. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 31 Select the roof slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. 29 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). click Modify. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and select all of the roof edges. and on the Options Bar.

under Construction. and soffits. In some cases this type of slope is desired. you can easily create its fascia. for the Thermal/Air Layer. After you create a roof. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 35 Click OK 3 times. on the File menu. 37 If you want to save your changes. click Edit. for Structure. you learn how to create roof fascia. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Gutters. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. gutters. select Variable.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 36 View the results in the section view. gutters. Gutters. click Edit/New. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and Soffits In this lesson. Creating Fascia. and Soffits on page 586. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. By making the insulation layer variable. The entire slab is sloped. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. click Save As.

10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Name dialog. under Construction.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and open Common\c_Condominium. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click (Properties).rvt. and click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click Open. enter Built-up Fascia. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. 3 Press CTRL. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Duplicate. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters on page 588. 2 On the Options Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. c_Condominium.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar.

under Construction. Creating Soffits on page 590. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Duplicate. . click Edit/New. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK three times. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. Creating Gutters | 589 . and click OK.3 In the Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material.

3 On the Design Bar.Creating Soffits In this exercise. click Pick Roofs. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. c_Condominium. you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Floor Plans.

6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.4 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. Creating Soffits | 591 . and double-click 3D. click Join Geometry. 8 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Tools menu.

9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

rvt. In the final exercise. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. select Millimeters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Unit Suffix. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. under Length. your values will be different. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. If you are using metric units. click Project Units. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select mm. click Training Files. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Finally. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. 593 . 2 In the Project Units dialog. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Click OK. and open Common\c_Area. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans.

and click Room and Area. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. For Unit Suffix. select 2 decimal places.3 Under Area. click the Area Schemes tab. expand Views (all). 4 In the Project Units dialog. it is not necessary in this exercise. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. the system-computed height defaults to the level. expand Floor Plans. These schemes define spatial relationships. select Square meters. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. select m2. Click OK. or 0. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. click the Room Calculations tab. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . right-click in the Design Bar. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. click Settings. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. For Rounding. click OK.

area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 13 In the Project Browser. you must select one of the reference lines. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). When you select Yes in this dialog. If you select No. 9 Click Cancel. you must manually add these boundary lines. Click OK. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. To modify the area. forming a closed loop. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 .You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. rather than the area tag. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 12 When the informational dialog displays. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area Plan. under Views (all).

common areas. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 21 On the Options Bar. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Next. Click OK. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and store area. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Plan. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. click Area Boundary. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas.

If you do not select this option. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . click Area. 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 25 On the Design Bar. you can either draw them or pick them. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. When you pick the walls. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model.When you add area boundary lines. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click Modify. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. and click to select the area. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ .

click Area. Click OK. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK.■ ■ Select Office area for Area Type. 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Select Office area for Area Type. 29 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. click Modify and select the area. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall.

and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. enter Core for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.■ Click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Store Area for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core.

2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. name the project Area-in progress.rvt. and click to place the legend. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. In the next exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. click Color Scheme Legend. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 37 On the File menu. click Save. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. and click Save. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.

click the Fields tab. and click OK. select Areas (Rentable). Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 7 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. under Category. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar.3 When the dialog displays. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. select Area Type and click Add.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

If you modify a massing face. floor. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and roofs.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you make building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. floors. and perimeter information. or both. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. you then need to update the building face. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You assign the default wall. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. At any time. roofs. building elements. curtain systems. After creating mass floors. 603 . you can specify the view to display massing elements. In this tutorial. and floors. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. volume. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and cutting geometry. and click Massing.rvt. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . sweeps. double-click Level 1. click Create Mass. under Floor Plans. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. click Training Files.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. under Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser.

12 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click Finish Sketch. enter 1550 mm. under Floor Plans. (Line). for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. for Extrusion End. and on the Options Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and click . click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Pick Lines). click the value for Material. double-click Level 1. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click (Default 3D View). under Views (all). and click OK. under Constraints. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Materials and Finishes. click Lines. 10 In the Materials dialog. 13 On the View toolbar. click 18 On the Options Bar. enter 25000. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. select Mass (Opaque). click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 15 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Extrusion Properties.

for Extrusion End. under Constraints. under Materials and Finishes. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Pick a plane. under Views (all). double-click West. under Views (all). click Extrusion Properties. press TAB to highlight the entire face. enter 27500. click the value for Material. highlight the larger form. TIP If necessary. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . 21 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. select Mass (Transparent). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. and click . and click OK. enter 25000. 26 In the Project Browser. for Name. double-click {3D} to see the results.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. for Extrusion Start. 23 In the Materials dialog. 30 In the drawing area. and click OK. The second form is on top of the first form. and click OK. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser.

Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. Next. click (Draw). (Pick Lines). 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and on the Options Bar. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and click to select the line start point. 34 On the Options Bar. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. click (Arc passing through three points).31 Click to select the face. and clear Chain.

click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 39 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. click Lines and. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. and delete the vertical construction line. 46 On the Design Bar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. double-click East. click Modify. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line.TIP If you do not see this option. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click (Move). on the Options Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. under Views (all). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 45 In the Project Browser. (Line). 608 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Finish Sketch. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 53 On the View toolbar. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. for Material. click (Default 3D View). click Blend Properties. In this exercise. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 52 On the Design Bar.48 On the Options Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. (Arc passing through three points). you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. In the next exercise. and click OK.

m_Massing_Start. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. and select Chain. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Line). 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 9 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 2 In the drawing area. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 4 On the Options bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click Lines. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Ref Plane. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 7 Using the same technique. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1.rvt. as shown. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. select the mass. under Floor Plans. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.

you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. When sketching each extrusion. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. Using Swept Blends | 611 . on the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. for Extrusion End. 14 Under Constraints. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 17 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties. 15 Click OK. snap the corners to the intersections. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click (Default 3D View). In this exercise. enter 0. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap.

click Sketch 2D Path. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . m_Massing_Start. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).rvt. ■ For the radius.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. and click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. 3 On the Design Bar. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. select a point below the mass elements. 4 On the Options Bar.

and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. click Lines. 9 On the Options Bar. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click Finish Path. click (Default 3D View). click Profile 1. The only way to align these elements is visually. 10 On the Design Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click (Rectangle). From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. as shown. Using Swept Blends | 613 .Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 11 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar.

Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar. click Profile 2. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click (Align). 17 Using the same method.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. and press ESC. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge.

21 In the Materials dialog.18 On the Design Bar. and click . click Finish Swept Blend. select Mass (Transparent). click Swept Blend Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click <By Category>. click Finish Profile. under Materials and Finishes. 22 Click OK twice. Using Swept Blends | 615 . Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar.

Finally.rvt. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. click Finish Mass. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. you create new family types from a mass family file. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.24 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study.

enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 18000 mm. enter 46000mm. and click Apply. enter 15000mm. for Depth. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for Height. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. and click Apply. enter 6000 mm. and click OK. 8 For Width. click Training Files. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 7 Click New. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 6 For Width. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Width. In this exercise. enter 11000 mm. 5 Click New. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Height. 4 In the Family Types dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa. for Depth.rfa. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 9000 mm. for Height. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. 9 Click OK. and click OK. enter 68000 mm. under Other. and click Apply. and for Name. click Family Types. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 12000 mm. and for Name. for Depth. enter 18000 mm. click New.

and Triangle. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Open the Box-Training. 1 If not already selected.rvt. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. double-click Site. 8 In the Type Selector. Arc Dome. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .rfa. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. under Views (all). Semi Barrel Vault. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. on the View toolbar. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa family files. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 3 On the View Control Bar.rfa. 2 In the Project Browser. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Place Mass.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.rfa. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. as shown. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. and click to place the mass. 25 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 17 Press CTRL. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. specify Mass (Opaque). select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. click Modify. and click OK twice. 21 On the Options Bar. for the Material parameter. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. select the 3 boxes.10 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select the triangle. click Place Mass. click Place Mass. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . specify Mass (Transparent). enter 90 for Angle. 20 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Selector. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. and click (Element Properties). 11 Select the box.

click (Default 3D View). 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Opaque). for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. and click (Element Properties). click Place Mass. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Transparent). 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties).26 Select the triangle. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 33 On the View toolbar. 29 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter.

Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . (Join Geometry). Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements. click (Default 3D View). NOTE When you join geometry.rvt file. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. In the next exercise.

under Views (all). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Select the triangle. click (Mirror).3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. on the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans.

8 On the Options Bar. for Axis. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. enter SM. and then select the triangle. 17 Press ESC to see the result. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. as shown. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. (Join Geometry). 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. click (Draw). and snap to the midpoint of the edge. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . click (Default 3D View). 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.

click Modify. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. and select the triangle mass element.In this exercise. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. do not clear the check mark. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. (If Design Options is already selected. 1 On the Design Bar. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. you joined mass elements together. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set).rvt. 2 On the Window menu.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar.

specify Mass (Transparent). for Angle. enter 90. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 17 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. and click (Element Properties). double-click Site. 5 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. clear Curved. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. and click OK twice.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 13 On the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. select Sloped (primary). 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . under Views (all). 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Modify. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. click Place Mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown.

click Modify. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. and watch the status bar. for the Material parameter. 28 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. TIP To find the correct shapes. under Views (all). under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click OK twice. and click OK.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 23 On the View Control Bar. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 20 In the drawing area. double-click North. click (Add to Design Option Set). 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. and click (Element Properties). 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Elevations. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. select the three arc domes. clear Sloped. under Views (all). specify Mass (Transparent). 22 In the Project Browser. select Curved. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. While pressing CTRL. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults.

click (Design Options). Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click the Design Options tab. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 31 Click the value for Design Option. click Make Primary. you can make it the primary option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 35 On the File menu. select Curved and. select Curved from the Design Option menu. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.rvt. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. you placed mass elements into Design Options. under Option. 34 Close the warning that displays. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. and click Close. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. In this exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. you pick massing faces to create walls. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click {3D}. click (Pick Faces). and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click Wall by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 2 On the View toolbar. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 5 In the Type Selector. select Wall Centerline. and for Loc Line. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .Brick on CMU.rvt.

under Floor Plans. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. 8 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 5. 16 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click Level 3. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 12 On the Design Bar. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 1.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU.

23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 9. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). click Wall by Face.18 Select all the faces shown in red. If desired.

1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 6 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. volume. 4 Click OK.rvt. and click OK. select all levels. perimeter. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. under Views (all). Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.In this exercise. and Walls. When you select levels. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Curtain Panels. Curtain Systems. click Mass Floors. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . and exterior surface area.

select Levels 1-4. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK. click Modify. click Mass Floors. 11 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . select Level 1. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Mass Floors. 15 Press CTRL. 16 On the Options Bar. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model.14 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step).

under Category. Floor Volume. select Mass Floor. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. and click OK. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.rvt. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and select Level. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. schedules can be created using the mass floors. The Floor Area. press and hold SHIFT. select Floor Area. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 4 Using the same method. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Add. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.In this exercise. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. Floor Perimeter. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects.

The Mass Floor Schedule displays. enter Retail. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . for Sort by. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. and click OK. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. for Usage. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type.

click Edit. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Remove. After you assign usage. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. 14 Select Level. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. expand Schedules/Quantities.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. under Other. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. under Scheduled fields (in order). 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click Mass Floor Schedule. and click Properties. for Fields. 13 With Usage selected. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. under Other. select Floor Area. and click Rename. 16 On the Formatting tab. under Other. for Filter by. select Usage. select Usage. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Field formatting. and click OK. and plan views. click Edit. and in the field below. for Filter. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 24 In the Project Browser. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and select Grand totals. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. under Fields. for Sort by. 23 In the Rename View dialog. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. in the field under Filter by. for Filter. 27 Click OK twice. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level. 18 On the Filter tab. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 22 In the Project Browser. for Then by. 19 Click OK twice. enter Hotel. elevation. and click OK.

The mass floor schedules list. 1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you created mass floor schedules. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}.rvt. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . floor perimeter. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. click Roof by Face. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. under Views (all). the floor area. by level.

4 In the Type Selector. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.400mm. select Basic Roof : Generic . 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. Your model should now look as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof.

In this exercise. 13 Using the same method. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Curtain Panels. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. select Sloped Glazing. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.8 Using the method you just learned. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 12 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. and Walls. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. Curtain Systems.

verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create System. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 5 Press CTRL. 3 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). double-click {3D}.rvt.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .9 On the Options Bar. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create System. 11 Using the same method.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command.rvt. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you change the size of an existing mass family. In this exercise.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. under Views (all). click Modify. clear Exclude Design Options. clear Curtain Panels. 2 On the View menu. and then click OK. for Width. click Visibility/Graphics. Floors. and Walls. Roofs. and click OK. and click (Element Properties). 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Next. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 3 On the Model Categories tab.1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Curtain Systems. enter 30000. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 .

11 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View Control Bar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. In the next steps. double-click Level 1.

15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click Remake.TIP To select the curtain wall. you want to select the smaller one. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click (Default 3D View). click OK. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 17 Select the roof as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. Also.

and click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar.

click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. 1 Open the 3D view. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. under Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.20 In the Project Browser.rvt. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you changed the size of an existing mass family. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing .Massing only. 4 Rename the view 3D . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. right-click {3D}. 3 In the Project Browser.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. and click OK. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 9 Select Mass. 6 On the Model Categories tab. click All to select all categories.

to the building shell. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. You might create the model shown. This concludes the massing tutorial. such as columns and an extruded roof.In this exercise. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . If desired.

652 .

You mirror one instance of the group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. In this tutorial. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and typical office layouts. or with those working on a different project. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. 653 . the host group is also updated automatically. After you create a model group. Creating. For example. When you make changes to a nested group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. place. you not only simplify their placement. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Modifying. In this exercise. hotel rooms. In another exercise. and modify repetitive units. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. all instances in the building model are updated. You can also nest groups within other groups.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. By grouping objects. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you also simplify the modification process. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

enter ZR. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. expand Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. expand Views (all). 2 Click in the drawing area.rvt. and double-click First Floor. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

Creating and Placing a Group | 655 .3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. click (Group). 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. enter Typical Kitchen.

select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

and click Create Instance. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . click Modify. under Groups. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.

17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate). 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . and on the Edit toolbar.

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated. click Modify. as shown. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. and click to select it. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Modifying a Group | 661 . 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you finish editing. you make changes to an instance of a group. click Save As. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. and click Save.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. press TAB to highlight the wall. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.

8 On the Design Bar. press TAB. and click member to group instance.). This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the wall. select the element. press TAB. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).). 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. NOTE To display an excluded element. 7 Click (Group Member.).3 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

move the cursor to the left. select Basic Wall : Generic . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 14 In the Type Selector. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Modifying a Group | 663 .Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Wall.127mm. 10 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Modify. click Door. clear Tag on Placement.

17 On the Design Bar. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. click Modify. In edit group mode. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. move the cursor up. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 23 In the drawing area. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Edit Group. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 21 On the Options Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.

Nesting Groups In this exercise. (Element Properties). under Constraints. for Unconnected Height. click Finish. enter 1000. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.25 On the Design Bar. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. which acts as the host. and on the Options Bar. click 28 For Base Offset. you add the Typical Kitchen group. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Nesting Groups | 665 . 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. created in an earlier lesson. 29 On the group editor toolbar. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. and click OK. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 26 Select the opening. enter 2134.

rvt. select the Typical Kitchen group. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 5 In the drawing area.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. click Edit Group. click (Add to Group). 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 4 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans.

7 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor.6 Press TAB. and each of the bifold doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. 8 In the Project Browser. click Finish. Nesting Groups | 667 .

Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. such as door and window tags. such as text. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. and filled regions. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you add door tags to a group. In the next exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. under Floor Plans. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and select a point below the left elevator. 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region.

17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click (Group). as shown. 12 Enter Tile. 16 In the drawing area. click to add an arc leader. click Text. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 9 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and select the text note and the filled region. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Design Bar.

click Modify. under Groups. expand Detail. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 22 On the Design Bar. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Because the detail group contains variables. double-click Second Floor.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 .

NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click Tag ➤ By Category. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.manner that a drawing component can be added. double-click First Floor. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. clear Leader. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt.

double-click Second Floor. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click Check None. click (Group). 8 In the Filter dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. for Attached Detail Group Name. 9 On the Edit toolbar. select Door Tags. click (Filter Selection).7 On the Options Bar. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 .

When you load the group from the library into a new project. and click OK. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Modify. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. click Place Detail. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. 14 On the Options Bar. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. therefore.

select 2 Bedroom Unit. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. for Create new. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and expand Model. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). expand Groups. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 5 In the New Project dialog. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 3 For File name. and click Open. A warning dialog displays. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. accept the default template file.rvt. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. verify that Project is selected. browse to the Desktop. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save Group.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 12 On the Design Bar. click OK.rvt. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. In this case. and click OK. and click Create Instance. click Desktop. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. under Groups\Model. verify that Same as group name is selected.

25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Remove Link. click OK. and the link is removed. and on the Options Bar. verify that Attached Details is selected only. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. click Use Existing. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. expand Revit Links. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 24 In the message dialog. click Modify. When a group is converted to a link. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.rvt. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 18 In the Project Browser. click Bind. click Training Files. and click OK. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. select the linked Revit model. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 20 On the Options Bar. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Link. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. convert the data to a table. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You add property lines manually. islands. In the final exercises. you add a building pad to the site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. Using Site Tools In this lesson.Site 19 In this tutorial. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. and then modify the data. and walkways. 677 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface.

and open Metric\m_First_Project. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. click Point. 3 On the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Site. you create a toposurface using two different methods. click Toposurface. and click Site. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. click Training Files. expand Views (all). 678 | Chapter 19 Site . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. This project file was created using the default metric template. 4 On the Options Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. In the second part of this exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Using the first method.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan.rvt.

Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle.

under Increment. Use the following illustration as a reference.8 On the Options Bar. click Site Settings. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. 15000mm. enter 1500mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 On the Settings menu. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. under Additional Contours. click Finish Surface. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 12000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm.

16 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). enter 1000mm. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click to delete it. click (Default 3D View). and press ENTER. and double-click South. 15 On the View Control Bar. click to view it at various angles. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. click the elevation value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. Before importing the contour data. modify the level names and elevations. 18 In the Project Browser. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . under Views (all). 14 On the View toolbar.

click Pin Position. and press ENTER. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Until it is exploded. double-click Site. and press ENTER. click Modify. click Yes. under Views (all). 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Verify that Current view only is not selected. select Specify. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. click Training Files. 29 Select the imported topography. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Colors. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. it is considered an import symbol. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views.21 Click the Level 2 text. For Layers. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 30 On the Edit menu. under Floor Plans. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 24 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. select Preserve. rename the level Basement. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . Click Open. and click OK. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.

clear Elevations. and then click OK. click Modify. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. select it. clear C_INDX. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 32 On the View menu. when the edges highlight. 36 On the Design Bar. When you select the import symbol. click Toposurface.31 On the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility.

Using the second method. name the project Site-in progress. click (SteeringWheels). 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you add property lines using two methods. 42 On the View toolbar.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Using the first method. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 40 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. this project file is required in its current state. click Finish Surface. and click Save.rvt. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 39 On the Design Bar.

4 On the Design Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise. double-click Site. click Property Line. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding Property Lines | 685 . do so before continuing. click Lines. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. click Lines. Site-in progress. Select and delete the right vertical line.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Click Modify. and click OK. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. select Create property lines by sketching.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

add an arc line on the right. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. 9 In the warning dialog. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click 12 On the Design Bar. click OK. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Property Line. to delete them. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. when they highlight. A warning dialog is displayed. click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. on the Standard toolbar. select Edit Table. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. select the lines. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.

scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This means there is no gap in the property lines. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 19 In the Tags dialog. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click to place the property lines. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 16 Click OK. If the gap is not closed. 15 Starting in Row #1.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.20 Click Load. click to place it. The tags display more prominently in this view. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. click Visibility/Graphics. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Tag ➤ By Category. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 22 In the Tags dialog. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. In the final step.rfa. you created two sets of property lines. 25 Under Visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 30 On the View Control Bar. this project file is required in its current state. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. click the Imported Categories tab. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click Training Files. 27 On the Options Bar.dwg and click OK. Before adding property line segment tags. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 23 On the View menu. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. and click Drafting. and click OK. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

select Dash dot. Under Line Color. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Working Contour. Under Subcategory. 2 On the Settings menu. Under Range Type. In the Object Styles dialog. 7 Click OK. click Object Styles. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 10 Under Additional Contours. under Contour Line Display.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. enter 1000. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. enter the name Working Contour. and click OK. click Site Settings. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu.rvt. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select a shade of Brown. select Topography. Under Line Pattern. Site-in progress. for Subcategory. click New. select Single Value. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.0mm. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog.

In the next exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . parking areas. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. The object style subcategory. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Click OK. Working Contour. In this exercise. parking areas. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. such as material. you create subregions in order to define roads. The next exercise requires a new training file. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. and islands. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create topographic subregions to define roads. and islands.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Site. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide.rvt. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 2 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. click Training Files. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Lines. try to replicate the location and proportion.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Finish Sketch. enter Parking for Name. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar.Tarmacadam for Name. click the value for Material. under Identity Data.NOTE In the Metric training file. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click to open the Materials dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the Materials dialog. select Site . click Properties. under Materials and Finishes. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click OK.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Edit Boundary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click Site.9 On the View Control Bar. As you create new subregions. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. and double-click Topography Schedule.Tarmacadam. they display within this schedule. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. expand Schedules/Quantities. 12 On the View Control Bar. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. 14 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces.

21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Within each subregion. click Lines. click Subregion.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 16 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the project area has increased. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Delete overlapping lines. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. In this training project. 22 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule.

under Identity Data. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 30 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. select Site . 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click Topography Schedule. enter Island . Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.23 In the upper-right parking area. and click OK.Grass for Name. 24 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. and click to open the Materials dialog. 26 In the Materials dialog. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration.Grass for Name. click Properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 29 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. double-click Site. Name each region Island Grass. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. Notice that the schedule has been updated. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. click Subregion. 32 In the Project Browser.walkway. under Floor Plans. Name the subregion Walkway. Using the techniques learned in previous steps.31 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. and apply the material Site . click Lines.Grass. 34 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ .

If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. 38 In the Project Browser. there is still only one toposurface. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . 37 On the Design Bar. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 2 Select the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. and click Save. When you use the grading tool. this project file is required in its current state. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.rvt. double-click Site.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

select Copy Internal Points. A warning dialog is displayed. and click Select and Edit. 5 On the Design Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing.3 On the Options Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Using Phasing on page 761. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. select Existing for Phase Created. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Modify. 8 Select the topographic surface. under Phasing. 6 On the Design Bar. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Graded Region. click (Element Properties). see the tutorial. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter.

10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished. and new. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Point. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View toolbar.13 Press DELETE. click (Default 3D View). Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 17 On the Design Bar.

you create a building pad. 23 Select the toposurface. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. When you add a building pad. this project file is required in its current state. you can delete it. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. Only the graded topography displays. specify Existing for Phase. and delete it. click to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. (SteeringWheels). and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Therefore. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 24 On the View menu. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. only the original toposurface displays. click View Properties. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. under Phasing. specify New Construction for Phase. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. click View Properties.20 On the View toolbar. under Phasing. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Building Pad | 703 .

click Lines.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the Pick Walls command is active. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE By default. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. If you have an existing building model. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Finish Sketch. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. click Pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

Adding Site Components on page 706. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. this project file is required in its current state. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Notice the new building pad. 9 On the View toolbar. 7 On the View Control Bar. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View).

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.90 deg.rvt. double-click Site.Adding Site Components In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . click Parking Component. and select the parking space.

8 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Adding Site Components | 707 .

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. choose any tree type. Notice the new parking spaces. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Type Selector. click Site Component. under Floor Plans.9 On the View toolbar. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . click (SteeringWheels).

13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Adding Site Components | 709 . 14 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View toolbar. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. In the following illustration.

5 On the View menu. and click OK. click Hidden Line. Site tutorial-in progress. click Apply. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. this project file is required in its current state. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click Apply. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site.rvt. click Tag All Not Tagged. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. under Floor Plans.

You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. as shown: 10 Using the same method. Click again to the left to position the leader. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Click up and to the left. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 8 On the Options Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. to position the shoulder of the leader. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . outside of the site. In the following exercise. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance.

712 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the 3 spot dimensions. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. click Modify.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 11 On the Design Bar.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create a parking schedule. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.■ Clear Leader. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. this project file is required in its current state. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

number the first three spaces consecutively. click Tile. and click OK. and click Add. Site tutorial-in progress. If necessary. select Mark. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . select Type. click the Fields tab. and click Add. and click OK. and under Heading. The parking schedule is displayed. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 4 Under Available fields. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. select Parking for Category.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 In the Site plan. 9 On the Window menu. 11 On the Window menu. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Under Fields. enter Size. select Type. 5 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click Close Hidden Windows. 7 Under Fields.rvt. enter Space. 6 Click the Formatting tab. under Views (all). select Mark. and under Heading. 13 In the Parking Schedule. under Floor Plans. under Space.

the selected space highlights in the Site plan. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .

716 .

You can enable Worksharing for any project. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. To make a workset editable. such as annotations and dimensions. and click Editable. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. Working in a shared project In a shared project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. The first time you activate worksets within a project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Using Worksharing. stairs. select the desired workset. however. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. A workset is a collection of building elements. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. go to the Worksets dialog. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. use Element Borrowing. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. After the project is shared. When you are working on a shared project. All other team members can view this workset. Elements specific to a view. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. they cannot make changes to it. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. and so on. you specify an active workset. such as walls. In this tutorial. called Worksharing. you must first enable Worksharing. 717 . floors. doors. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. This prevents possible conflicts within the project.

you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. After learning the fundamentals. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Instead. In a multi-story structure. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. such as a tenant interior. When setting up Worksharing. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Team size 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. In the next exercise. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.

Shared Levels and Grids. When creating the new worksets. As new members create worksets for their own use. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. with each assigned a specific functional task. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. designers work in teams. When you create a new workset. each team member has control over a portion of the design. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Experience has shown that. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Regardless of the default setting. and View worksets. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. You should have at least one workset for each person. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. In most projects. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. On this tab. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. not including the Project Standards. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. for a typical project. Team member roles Typically. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project.

Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you can select which workset is active. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. within the local file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. As you work. When you save to the central file. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. proceeds as usual. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. After saving to the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Generally.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. your changes propagate to the entire team. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you should then save to your local file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. For example. your changes are saved. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. When you save locally (to your local file). it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This makes them available to other team members. However. Therefore. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. On the Options Bar. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. When finished or at regular intervals. you make that workset editable by you. if a workset named Interior was created. the file is saved as the central file. however. When you save to the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. This is called “Selective Open. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets.

The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. When working remotely. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. In this situation. you work no differently then you would in the office. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . In this instance. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. and then save the local file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. using VPN. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. for instance. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Alternatively. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you should check out the Materials workset. save to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. make any required worksets editable. To do this. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. if you know who checked out the required workset. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. and make that workset editable. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. reload the latest changes from the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.

TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. and open Common\c_Worksets. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing.rvt. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. click Training Files. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. under Show. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.In the next exercise. click Worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects ." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Worksets dialog. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Your username displays as the present owner. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. and notice all are editable by you. The Worksets dialog displays. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.

select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. You do. 8 Click OK. When you initially activate Worksharing. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. clear Visible by default in all views. currently named Workset1. a small number of team members are working on the building model. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. 12 Click Rename. 9 Click New. imagine four users including yourself. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. and Views. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. clear Families. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. expand Views (all). and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Project Standards.When you enable worksharing. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. click OK. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 13 In the Rename dialog. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. click New. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. For example. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. expand Floor Plans. In this simple training project. 11 In the Worksets dialog. In this case. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. another is assigned the interior layout. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. In this training file. and double-click Level 1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. select Workset1. For training purposes. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 14 In the Worksets dialog. it is better to make them visible by default. 16 In the drawing area. Because the interior walls appear in many views. and click OK. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Therefore. you can rename the default workset. however. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. ■ 5 Under Show. Only User-Created worksets should display. type the name Exterior Shell.

select Interior Layout for Workset. 21 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. including the interior doors. and click OK. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 29 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. click . Hold Shift down to deselect an element. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click . The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 24 On the Options Bar. stairs. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click . and walls. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. under Identity Data. and click OK. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. under Identity Data.17 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 2. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click the Worksets tab. click Visibility/Graphics. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click Non Editable. 42 On the right side of the dialog. 34 In the drawing area. In this exercise. Now that you have created the central file. If any interior elements remain. select all of the interior elements of the building model. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 33 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. 39 Click Save. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. under Views (all). click Save As. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. and click OK. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 44 On the File menu. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 43 Click OK. 35 On the Options Bar. click Worksets. under Floor Plans. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 41 In the Worksets dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 30 On the View menu. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click Close. click . 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 38 In the Save As dialog. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 32 Select Interior Layout. and click OK.

and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 2 In the Open dialog. please do so before continuing. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. select Interior Layout. and click OK. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. select Interior Layout for Name. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 7 In the Save As dialog. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. 6 On the File menu. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and select Specify. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 15 In the Project Browser. Before working on the model. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select the central file. make modifications to the building model. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. In this case. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 12 Click OK. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. you create your local file. and click OK. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. check out worksets. click Save As. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 13 On the Window menu. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. expand Views (all). Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click Save. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 4 Click Open. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 11 In the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. If you have not yet completed the exercise. In addition. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Next. click Open.

select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . under Identity Data. If this is selected. 23 On the File menu. 21 On the Options Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. In the Worksets dialog. however. On the Options Bar. click . 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 22 Click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Under Constraints. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. notice the Editable Only option. Verify that it is cleared. click Modify. In this case. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. click . you can still edit this wall. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Because this element is not owned by another user.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Click OK. click Worksets. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. and click OK. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. If it was owned by another user.

and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Door. click Modify.126mm Partition (2-hr). 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Wall. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. The precise location is not important. 34 In the Type Selector. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 Delete the door.

leave this file open in its current state. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . For training purposes. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. two users access the central file through a network connection. you should perform regular saves. and save locally immediately afterward. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. In addition. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. Whenever you save. you created your local file.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. If you have not yet completed these exercises. each user must check out worksets. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Borrowed Elements is selected. In this exercise. you should relinquish all worksets. it is recommended. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. make elements editable. Throughout the process. When working in your local file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. You modified the building model. By default. and reload the latest changes. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. click Save to Central. please do so before continuing. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. At the end of a work session. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. In this particular case. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. checked out worksets. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. save to central. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. displays the workset as well as the element type. a tooltip.

The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. one user has already created a local file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. return to the Settings dialog. click Options.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. User 2: Create a local file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Open. specifically sequenced. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog.rvt. 7 In the Open dialog. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 9 Click Open. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. 12 In the Save As dialog. click Options. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). In the following section of this exercise. enter User 2. and click OK. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. select the central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. This is a system setting. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and click OK. instructions are staggered. 15 On the File menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and proceed to Creating a local copy. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. skip the following section. under Username. and select Yes for Editable. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. and click OK. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Save As. and select Specify. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 3 On the Settings menu. consider that person to be User 1. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You now have a local copy of the project. This file is for your use only. 11 On the File menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. For training purposes. select all the User-Created worksets. In addition. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and click Save. and reset the Username to your computer login name.

click Worksets. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and double-click Level 1. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. modify the building model. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. it becomes the active workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 23 Click OK. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. open it now.” 29 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. If it is not open. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 17 Click OK. 19 On the File menu. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 27 On the File menu. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . If you only have one workset checked out. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and select Yes for Editable. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. select the lower exterior wall. expand Floor Plans. User 1: Check out worksets. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated.You are now the owner of that workset. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1.

36 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. 33 On the File menu. Before adding any furniture. under Floor Plans. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. under Views (all). you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Yes for Editable. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you should create a furniture plan view. and click OK. click Save to Central. 42 Select Furniture Layout. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 38 In the Save to Central dialog. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. However. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Click Yes. click Worksets. 44 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 46 In the Project Browser. 37 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 41 On the File menu. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 34 In the Save to Central dialog.” 35 Click OK. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active.” 39 Click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 43 In the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. click Reload Latest. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. When you save to central.

and click OK. click Save to Central. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Show. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. are placed under Project Standards. such as Wall Types. 63 In the Worksets dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Reload Latest. 66 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. 50 On the View menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.” 55 Click OK. and click OK. Therefore. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. choose any desk. click Save to Central. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 53 On the File menu. 61 Click OK 2 times. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 62 On the File menu. click Component. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE System families. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 60 In the Rename dialog. and click Element Properties. 49 On the Design Bar. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. rather than Families. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 48 In the Type Selector. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click inside any room. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. select Project Standards. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Worksets. enter Exterior Wall . click Modify. click Rename. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. the Visible by default option was not selected.200mm. 65 Click OK.

These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. select the following. In the left pane of the Open dialog. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. User 1: Reload latest. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Each user checked out worksets. 70 On the File menu. select Save to Central. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. There are specific instructions for each user. In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Save As. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. leave this file open in its current state. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 3 In the Save As dialog. leave this file open in its current state. finished the previous workset exercises. and still have your local files open. Each user must have network access to the central file. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. In subsequent steps. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Training Files.rvt. modified the building model. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. you save the training file as a central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. As each of you work. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. and save 69 On the File menu. Checking out worksets. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. you need to set up your central and local files. throughout this training. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. click Options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and these problems are rectified. and published their changes back to the central file. select Reload Latest. and click OK. This exercise requires two users and.

8 In the Save As dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. On the Settings menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 17 On the File menu. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Next. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. select Make this a Central File after save. select the central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This is a system setting. return to the Settings dialog. Set the Username to User 2. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 15 Click Open. click Options. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and click Save. In addition. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. click Options. and click OK. click Open. and click Save. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 6 On the File menu. The central file should still be open. 5 Click Save. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 12 On the File menu. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 18 In the Save As dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . click Save As. This is the local file for User 1. You have created a local file which is for your use only. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and select Specify.4 In the File Save Options dialog. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. and click OK. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 13 In the Open dialog. click Save As.

select Exterior Shell. After you submit the request. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. select the Interior Layout workset. At this point. under Floor Plans. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. You are now the owner of that workset. click Worksets. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click Open. select Interior Layout. 22 In the Worksets dialog. and click Editing Requests. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and then click OK. double-click Level 1. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. select them. and select Yes for Editable. 30 On the left exterior wall. verify that Editable Only is cleared. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. click the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. select the second window from the top. 29 On the Options Bar. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. 24 Under Active Workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Afterwards. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 27 Under Active Workset. and then click OK. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. if any User-Created worksets are not open. click Worksets.

35 Click Grant. and notice the window is in the new location. In this case. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . you requested permission to edit the element. to Local. and close 39 On the File menu. click Close. 38 Click OK. select the request submitted by User 2. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. click Check Now. select the following. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. In this multi-user exercise. and the other user granted it. 36 Click Close. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog.

738 .

Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 739 . Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. In addition. After you and the client agree on the final design. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. For example. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. In this tutorial. and each option set can have multiple schemes. At any time in the design process.

TIP In this exercise.In this particular case. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. In the second exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. therefore. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. make your final design decision. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. each with multiple design options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. the only available command is to create a new option set. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. In the first exercise in this lesson. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The client has asked you to create various options. you set up multiple design option sets. After you create a design option. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you design each of the structural options. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you can edit it. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . each is constructed for interchangeability. under Option Set. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. With the second option. click Training Files. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). the roof and structure systems must work together. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered.rvt. click New. 2 In the Design Options dialog. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.

select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. TIP To center the middle column. By selecting Multiple. 7 In the Type Selector. and click Close. 4 In the Project Browser. In this case. click Modify. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Column. select: ■ ■ ■ . Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 5 On the View menu. add three columns. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. expand Views (all). Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. expand Floor Plans. click Edit Selected.3 Select Option 1 (primary). 9 On the Design Bar. and the third column centered between the two. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. or add a dimension string between the columns. click 12 On the Options Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls.

the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. they are difficult to see in this view.14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. using the same technique. Because of the size of the columns. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 17 Zoom out and. click . 18 On the View toolbar. In the following illustration. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.

Adding a beam is a two-click process. select Round Bar : 50mm. Next. under Floor Plans. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. double-click TOP OF CORE. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. click Modify. 23 On the Design Bar. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click Beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The first click specifies the beam start point. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. In it. 19 In the Project Browser. you add the beams that span the columns. Use the following illustration as a guide. Zoom in on the upper right column.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . and click at its center to set the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.

zoom into the left column. move down to the next set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the View toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. select: ■ ■ ■ . 28 Zoom out.25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. click . and select the center of the column to add a copy. and click the center point.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 40 In the Rename dialog. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 41 Under Option Set. 42 Select Option Set 1 and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. select Option 1 (primary). 33 Click Finish Editing. click Rename. name the option Louvers. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. enter Structure for New. click New. not a new option set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. enter Brackets for New. and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 36 In the Rename dialog. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. click New. 46 Under Option. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. under Option Set. click Rename. and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. under Option. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 45 Under Roofing. enter Beam for New. click New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. click Rename. enter Roofing for New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . click Rename. under Option Set.

52 Click Close. under Floor Plans. click Rename. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 50 In the Design Options dialog. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 48 Under Option. double-click ROOF TERRACE. Under Now Editing. 51 Under Edit. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. it will resemble the following illustration.47 Under Roofing. and click OK. name the option Sunscreen. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Beam. select Edit Selected. you create the second design option. 53 In the Project Browser. under Structure. select Option 2. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. When finished.

The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector. select M_Roof Beam. Refer to the following illustration. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. click Component. click Align. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. The second click represents the move end point. 61 On the Design Bar. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 62 Select the beam and.60 After aligning the beam. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

and click Save. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 .rvt. which is visible by default. 66 On the View toolbar. click Save As. click Finish Editing. m_Urban_House-in progress. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 69 Click Close. 70 On the File menu. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 67 On the Tools menu. you need this file in its current state. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. name the file. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click .

click Component. each with multiple design options to pick from. a Louver system. 5 Click Close. The first option. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . do so now. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second roofing system. under Roofing. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. In the next exercise. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. expand Views (all). is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 2 On the Tools menu. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. you set up multiple design option sets. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 4 Under Edit. 6 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Edit Selected. 8 In the Type Selector. you design each of the roofing options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. the other for beams. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 10 Referring to the following illustration. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 3 In the Design Options dialog.rvt. Sunscreen. delete them after the rafter is in place. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. With the second option. Under Now Editing. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. If you need to add dimensions. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. open it now. select Louvers (primary).

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Array. Select 2nd for Move To. and click OK. click .11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. under Other. enter 11750 mm for Length. click Modify. Enter 5 for Number. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 15 On the Edit menu. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 13 On the Options Bar.

Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . when the listening dimension displays. enter 990.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click .Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 5475 mm for Length. 26 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. under Other. and click OK. 20 In the Type Selector. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click the Edit menu. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 25 With the louver still selected. 27 For the array starting point. click Component. and click Array. click Modify. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. and select the louver you just placed. Enter 34 for Number. Select 2nd for Move To.

754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and. enter 300. click . and press Enter. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. when the listening dimension displays. 29 On the View toolbar.

Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 31 In the Design Options dialog. click Edit Selected. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click West. Click OK. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. under Roofing. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . click Finish Editing. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog.The louver roof system is complete. 30 On the Tools menu. 33 Under Editing. 34 In the Project Browser. select Sunscreen. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 40 On the Options Bar. In this case. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Therefore. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. click . click Lines. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. under Edit. expand Elevations. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. and then click Close. 39 On the Design Bar.

then you can modify it through the dimension. 45 Click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. Under Constraints.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. the top of the next column on the right. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. click Trim/Extend. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Properties. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 41 Select the top of the left column. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 On the Design Bar. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 46 On the Tools menu. You will fix this in a later step. The arcs should connect. and the third point defines the arc. then the center arc. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. The first two points define the ends of the line. 49 On the View toolbar. Select the right arc. click Finish Sketch. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. Under Constraints.

was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 51 In the Design Options dialog. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. a Louver system. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. you designed each of the roofing options. tertiary. Managing Design Options In this exercise. After exploring the combinations. under Edit. and click Rename. The first option. click Save. and last options. and delete the discarded design options. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 2 In the Project Browser. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. right-click {3D}. and click Duplicate. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. click Finish Editing.The louver roof system is complete. expand 3D Views. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 50 On the Tools menu. and then click Close. 3 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Sunscreen. under 3D Views. The second roofing system. and click OK. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. secondary. under Views (all). you need this file in its current state. you select a design. 52 On the File menu. 4 In the Project Browser. do so now. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. make it part of the building model. In this exercise. enter Primary Option. under Views (all). Managing Design Options | 757 .

click Visibility/Graphics.5 Right-click each of the copies. 7 On the View menu. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. 9 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. click the Design Options tab. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). double-click Primary Option. click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View menu. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . double-click Secondary Option.

and click OK. double-click Last Option. and click OK. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. double-click Tertiary Option. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under 3D Views. In your design options. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. 19 On the View menu. 18 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 15 On the View menu. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. Managing Design Options | 759 . specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client.14 In the Project Browser. At this point. In this case.

Because the client has selected the design option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Yes. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 25 Select Structure. double-click Primary Option. select Beam. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. you selected a design. under Structure. 35 On the File menu. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 31 In the alert dialog. This was the client choice for structural. 24 Under Option. made it part of the building model. the beam option becomes part of the model. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 30 Under Option Set. the current primaries are no longer options. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Accept Primary. 26 Under Option Set. since you no longer need them. The set is deleted. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 33 In the Design Options dialog. An alert is displayed. select Make Primary.22 On the Tools menu. In this exercise. but should be accepted as part of the building model. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 27 In the alert dialog. click Yes. click Delete. 29 Select Roofing. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 23 In the Design Options dialog. After exploring the combinations. click Save. click Close. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. and deleted the discarded design options.

You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. 761 . you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow. complete with schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. For the client. demolish existing construction. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views.Project Phasing 22 In any project. You create new phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. This changes room definition and total building model area. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the second exercise. demolish existing walls and doors. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You create new phases. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. and then add new building model elements.

two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. under Phasing. go to the Settings menu. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 On the Options Bar. During the demolition and renovation process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. When you create a new project. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 7 Click Cancel. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . expand Floor Plans. 4 Click Cancel. define the units. As you add new elements to the building model. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. click Modify. regardless of phase. and open Common\c_Phasing. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. click (Element Properties). are visible in this view. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. expand Views (all). NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. click Project Units. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. This means that all building model elements. If you wish to do so.

click (Filter Selection). all of the building model elements. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 14 On the Design Bar. Phasing Your Model | 763 . 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 . This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click Rename.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. enter Level 1 . and click OK. under Floor Plans. After you release the mouse button. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. click . 12 On the Options Bar. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. right-click Level 1 . and click OK. under Phasing.Existing. 10 On the Options Bar. Because this is a renovation project. 11 In the Filter dialog. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 20 In the Rename dialog. under Floor Plans. clear Door Tags. right-click Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. are highlighted in red. 17 Click No. Because this is a phase-specific view. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. enter Level 1 .Demo. for Phase Created. including the door tags. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. and click Rename.Existing. 16 In the Rename dialog. select Existing. click Modify. After you create the views. 18 In the Project Browser.Existing. TIP If this were a multi-story building. under Floor Plans. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.

22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Demo. you modify these settings.Existing. 21 In the Project Browser. select Existing. however. for Phase. Next. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. to which all the building model elements belong. and click OK. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. under New. Because of this time relationship. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Overridden. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. double-click Level 1 . On a logical time line. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. Demolished. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 29 For Composite Plan. Existing. under Phasing. Phase status is time-dependent. 28 Under Filter Name. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 27 Click New.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. enter Composite Plan. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. 26 In the Phasing dialog. There are five default phase filters. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. 24 In the Project Browser. In this case. You may need to zoom in to see this. Later in this exercise. under Floor Plans. click the Phase Filters tab. new construction occurs after existing construction. and Temporary.

When you demolish the host. its display changes to a red dashed line. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. select the interior walls one at a time. 39 In the Phasing dialog.31 Under Phase Status. you begin demolition. click (Demolish).Demo. 42 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. There are two ways to demolish an element. double-click Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 765 . The cursor is displayed as a hammer. under Floor Plans. under Cut ➤ Lines. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. select red. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. click OK. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. you demolish all elements hosted by it. select Demolished. select a lighter blue. 32 In the Demolished row. 35 Click OK twice. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. double-click Level 1 . Next.Existing. 34 In the Color dialog. select the line style. click the value for Color. As you click each wall. 36 Using the same method. or you can use the demolish tool.

44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Phasing. and click OK. 47 In the Type Selector. click Door.Existing. click Wall.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 49 On the Design Bar. 52 Open Level 1 .Demo. for Phase Filter. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 50 In the Type Selector. 53 Open Level 1 . 51 Add a door leading into each room. add a long horizontal wall. The demolished walls no longer display. and click OK. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show Previous + New. under Phasing. select Basic Wall: Interior .

New. which are displayed as red. because the phase filter is set to Show All. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). click (Default 3D View). new is shown in blue. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.Demo. 57 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 . 61 On the View Control Bar. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. The renovated building model plan is displayed. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.New. and existing shows as half-tone. regardless of phase.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. All elements are displayed in this view. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 62 If necessary. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 59 Open Level 1 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

go to the Settings menu. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. In the next exercise. 63 Close the file. You can also see that the room quantities. If you wish to do so. sizes. therefore. demolition. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. the rooms change in both definition and size.Existing.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. and double-click Level 1 . Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. In this view. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. define the units. click Project Units. you can do so at this time. you can see the new walls added to the building model. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. 3 Open Level 1 . 2 Open Level 1 . The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. In this view. As the renovation process continues. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. All room boundaries are phase-specific. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. expand Floor Plans. Notice that this view is the original building model. click Training Files. In this exercise. If you wish to save this file. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and click OK.rvt. expand Views (all). and new construction.New. you do not need to change the project units to metric. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style.Demo.

click Room. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 10 Open Level 1 . 5 Click OK. 13 Open Level 1 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. yet they have different room numbers. 6 Open Level 1 . click Room Tag. click in each room as you move to the right.New. click Modify. Use the following illustration as a guide. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Room. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Demo. and maximize the view. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. In the Phasing dialog.Existing. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 9 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Window menu.New Construction. 19 On the Window menu. In addition. In this case. 20 Close the file.Existing. View phase-specific room schedules. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. click Close Hidden Windows. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. In this exercise. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . expand Schedules/Quantities. 16 In the Project Browser. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. The two schedule views tile. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 18 Open Room Schedule .15 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Tile. and double-click Room Schedule . This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases.

In these situations. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In the final lesson. 771 . you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. performance. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. modify their visibility. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In this tutorial.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. This maximizes efficiency. and manage the links throughout the project.

NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. You link two building models to the project. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. One building model is a condominium. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site. and the other is a townhouse. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.Linking Building Models In this lesson. modify their visibility.

This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Auto .■ Auto . 4 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. and open Common\c_Site. click Close. Select c_Site. with write permission. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. Otherwise. Click Open. this system is not exposed to the user.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Open. select the three files.rvt. 2 On the File menu. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. c_Townhouse. click Training Files.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Save As. RELATED See the lesson. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and click Properties. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. in the Model Linking folder that you created. ■ ■ Manual . navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and click OK. All three files now reside. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. right-click. 8 Clear Read-only. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . 5 On the File menu. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . however. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. and save the file there. click Open. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. c_Condo_Complex. you can do so. this option will place the link at a predefined location. Manual . This option is grayed out. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.

you can go to the Settings menu. 10 In the Project Browser. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so. expand Views (all).Origin to Origin. For Positioning. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and double-click Level 1. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and make your changes. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 11 On the File menu. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 13 Click Open. expand Floor Plans. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. click Project Units.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Notice the blue detail lines. select Auto .

click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The first click specifies the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 17 For the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 15 On the Edit toolbar. The linked model moves as one object. click (Move). The second click specifies the move endpoint. 16 For the move start point.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The Move command requires two clicks. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.rvt displays in the Type Selector. After you select it. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model.

Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. select Auto . and select c_Townhouse. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 18 On the View menu.Origin to Origin. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 21 Click Open. For Positioning.After you specify the location to move to. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.

and click to specify the end of the rotation. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. when the vertical line displays. In this case. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . click to specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate). Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. you first specify the rotation start point.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.

The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. click (Move).

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. 30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point. click (Copy).

and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar. click . use the Move command to make any adjustments. enter Townhouse A. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. under Identity data. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click (Default 3D View). 32 On the Edit menu. click Rotate. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. for Name.

you modify the elevation of the townhouses.38 On the File menu. you need this project file open and in this view. If you have not completed the previous exercise. In this exercise. they were placed too low within the site topography. click and hold Orbit. When you originally linked the files. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. In the next exercise. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. do so before continuing. After linking the files. click Save. In this exercise. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 2 On the SteeringWheels.

To do this.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. and click OK. and then select the plane that you want to align. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Align). and double-click South. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. When using the Align command. In the steps that follow. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan.rvt. under Views (all). 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. In this case. 3 In the Project Browser. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and click to select it. expand Elevations. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. Click the Revit Links tab. when it highlights. you first select the plane you want to align to. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. and click to select the line. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

9 In the Project Browser. click and hold Orbit. 15 On the File menu. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 12 On the View toolbar. click Save. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 .Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. double-click North. click 13 On the View toolbar. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. This would over-constrain the model. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 11 Return to the South elevation view. click (Default 3D View). align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. (SteeringWheels). under Elevations.

and the halftone settings for each linked project. click By Host View. In the next exercise. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. If the Basics page is set to Custom. click the Revit Links tab. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 8 For Annotation Categories. By linked view. click Custom. scroll down and clear Levels. do so before continuing. 4 Under Visibility. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. you need this project file open and in this view. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. display settings. double-click South. If you have not completed the previous exercise.rvt. 2 On the View menu. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. click Visibility/Graphics. select <Custom>. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Elevations. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. When you link a file. you can independently control the visibility settings. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. or Custom. click OK. detail level. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. 10 Click OK.rvt.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As you can see. 9 Under Visibility. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. expand c_Townhouse. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise.

rvt. select <Custom>. and click OK. under Display Settings. select Custom. 20 For c_Townhouse. 14 On the View menu. 16 Under Visibility. or fine.rvt. By default. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. By selecting custom under Model Categories. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. on the Basics tab. no detail level changes are required. In this case. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. medium. click Visibility/Graphics.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps.rvt. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. You can click the value for Detail Level. With linked files. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. expand c_Townhouse. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. click the Revit Links tab. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. 24 Click OK. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then set the detail level to coarse. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . Using the Custom option. under Floor Plans. click By Host View. click the Revit Links tab. double-click Level 1. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. click Visibility/Graphics. 23 In the Model categories list.

26 Under Display Settings. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. on a sloped site for instance.rvt. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. select c_Townhouse. In this case. 29 Click OK. 31 On the File menu. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. 28 Select By linked view for View range. By default. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. and phase filter of a specific link. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. All other components are grayed out. 25 On the Revit Links tab. With the Show All filter applied. In this case. demolished. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. you manage the linked files. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. you need this project file open and in this view. all new. phase. click Custom for the Townhouse link. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. this is preferable. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. In most cases. In this exercise. there are situations. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. under Visibility. click OK. In the next exercise. However. click Save. existing. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height.

and Saved Path fields are read only. select c_Condo_Complex. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The default path type is Relative. Locations Not Saved. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 3 Under Path Type. 7 Click OK. click Yes. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. click Manage Links. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. the link is maintained. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. In a shared coordinate environment. 6 At the confirmation prompt. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. They supply information regarding the links. 4 Under Linked File.rvt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In general. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. do so before continuing. 5 Click Unload. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. Notice the Loaded. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. click the Revit tab. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 .

you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. the link is not loaded. If you choose not to open that workset. expand Revit Links. 9 On the File menu. right-click c_Condo_Complex.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. click the arrow next to the Open button. However. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. 8 In the Project Browser. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. click Save As. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens.rvt. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. To do this. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. In general. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. When you initially place the link. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. and select Specify. and click Reload. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In these cases. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files.

In the next lesson. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. When you share coordinates between projects. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. When used in conjunction with model linking. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. name the file Site_Project. In essence. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous lesson. leave the project file open in its current view. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files.10 In the Save As dialog. and the resulting project files. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. The host file consists primarily of site components. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. do so before continuing. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you are establishing a shared origin point. and save it as an RVT file.

Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. do so before continuing. and the resulting project files. When you are working in the host project.coordinates are used. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. open it before continuing. Select Site_Project. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. If you have closed the project. Linking Building Models on page 772. As indicated in the Status Bar. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files.rvt and click Open. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. click the Condo Complex. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. 2 On the Tools menu. In this case. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. click Open. If you have not completed the lesson. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Lot B. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. If you have not completed the exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. However. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. you need this project file open and in this view. On the Status Bar. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. do so before continuing. select Location 1. this location is not saved outside of the host project. and click OK. In this exercise. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . click to select it. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. even though both models originate from one linked file. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. but can have multiple additional locations. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. and Lot C. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. when the edges highlight. These three locations can be named Lot A. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. it is placed at a specific location. 5 On the Design Bar.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project.

under Instance Parameters. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.2 On the Options Bar. click . a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. click Change. enter Lot A for New. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog. When constraining a link to a location. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. click Not Shared for Shared Location. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. . select Move instance to. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 12 On the Options Bar. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Reconcile. In the Choose Location dialog. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog. 4 Under Value. Record the current position as a location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. This is a one-time operation. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location.

select Save. The second click specifies the move endpoint. When you release the mouse button. and then select the townhouse project. click Manage Links. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. click OK. 16 Click Change. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. When you create a location. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate.Notice the OK button is not active. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. 26 Click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. the active location position is moved. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 19 In the Select Location dialog. When you relocate a project. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. and the left townhouse resides at that location. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. click OK. make sure Lot B is selected. or cancel the action. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. By relocating a project. The first click specifies the move start point. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. ignore the warning. and click OK. and click OK. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. enter Lot B for Name. Notice the OK button is still not active. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. and click OK. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. Save locations 21 On the File menu. Because Lot A is currently in use. This is a two-click process. 30 On the Tools menu. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. click the Revit tab. select the second option. Record current position as. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. To explicitly save a location. you cannot redefine its location. a warning displays. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 23 Click Save Locations.

You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you work in one of the linked projects. click Save. 34 On the File menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. and click OK. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE In the following exercise. 36 On the File menu. 33 On the Edit menu. select Save. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. click Close. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. In this exercise.

Also. it is placed automatically within the host project. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. In this exercise. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. 2 On the File menu. If you have not completed the exercises. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. Click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. if other models were linked into the same host. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. select Auto . Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. When opening the linked file. do so before continuing. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. For Positioning. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Select c_Condo_Complex. click Open. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. Because this building model only has one named location. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file.By Shared Coordinates. double-click 1st Floor.rvt file. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. under Floor Plans. In addition. The current active location is Lot A.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files.

you manage the shared locations. If you have not completed the exercises. In this exercise. and click OK. you create a new location. 6 Select Lot B. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. 7 Click OK. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. and click Make Current. click OK. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. click View Properties. In this exercise. and click OK. click Duplicate. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. select True North for Orientation. 3 In the Name dialog. In the next exercise. In the host file. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Manage Place and Locations. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . orient a view to true north. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. do so before continuing. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. under Graphics. you need this project file open and in this view. you can select Lot C if necessary. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Lot C. click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location.

you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . If you have not completed the exercise. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. do so before continuing.rvt and click Open. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Select Site_Project. You can save the file if you wish. click Open. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. On the Options Bar. 10 On the File menu. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. click Close.

6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. 5 Under Available fields. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click Add. click the Fields tab. select Doors. under Category. select Count.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You have completed this tutorial. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. and click Properties. and then click OK twice. clear Itemize every instance. click Save. the schedule lists the total count for each door type.8 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. right-click Door Schedule. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . under Other. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 14 On the File menu. select Family and Type for Sort by. click Close. 12 Select Grand totals. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Schedules/Quantities. 13 On the File menu. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

rte. journal cleanup options. under Template file. you modify the system environment. These settings control the graphics. you create an office template. notification preferences. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. In the first lesson. Finally. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. click Browse. In the second lesson. 8 In the New Project dialog. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. selection default options. which is independent of the project settings. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 803 . 6 In the New Project dialog. and your username when using worksets.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click OK. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select Invert background color. and click OK. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 3 In the Options dialog. and set it as your default template. click Training Files. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 4 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab.

click Modify.10 In the Options dialog. the elements causing the error display using this color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 19 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Options dialog. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. When an error occurs. 13 Click the General tab. However. click No. 11 Under Colors. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Under Notifications. select yellow. select None. For Tooltip assistance. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 18 On the Design Bar. click Wall. and click OK. click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. For Selection color. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Click OK. 12 In the Color dialog. and select the wall. Notice that the system settings apply to this project.rvt. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. clear Invert background color. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. click the Graphics tab. select red. select One hour. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 22 When prompted to save changes. click the value for Selection color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click Training Files. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Settings.

and click Open. 5 Under Default path for user files. centralized. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. click Places. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.27 Click the General tab. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. do not save the changes. TIP To view a template. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. click the File Locations tab. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Under Journal File Cleanup. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. you specify default file locations. If prompted. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Specifying File Locations on page 805. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . 30 Proceed to the next exercise. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. you can start a new project with that template. 7 In the Options dialog. and family libraries. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 8 Click Cancel. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. Under Username. For Tooltip assistance. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. select Normal. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. click Browse. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. select the folder to save your files to by default. However. including your default project template. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 3 Under Default template file. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. These files are used in the software support process. 2 In the Options dialog. under Default path for family template files. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). such as in a large. and click Browse to select a template. select your preferred Save reminder interval. family template files. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse. notice the list of library names. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 10 In the Places dialog. Your login name displays by default.

and click Open. or families. under Libraries. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. Load. saving. and you can create new libraries.library names and path. click (Add Value). In the following illustration. templates. or loading a Revit Architecture file. When you are opening. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and change the name to My Library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 11 In the Places dialog. and click the icon side of the field. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save.

Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. If you work in a large office. specify the new location here.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 24 Click 25 Click OK. click the My Library icon. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 28 Click OK. click Edit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 15 Under Library Name. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. click Edit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 21 Click the File Locations tab. scroll down the list of building industry terms. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and decal image files. 5 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 3 Under Settings. 2 In the Options dialog. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Load. If you want to relocate this path. This path is determined during installation. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and Import dialogs. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Spelling tab. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path. 9 In the text editor. 23 Select My Library. custom color files. and click OK twice. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. click My Library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Remove Value) to delete the library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. such as bump maps. Save. 22 Click Places. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 .

12 On the Standard toolbar. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 23 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Text. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 20 Under Personal dictionary.rte. click default template. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Edit. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. click File menu ➤ Save. As you zoom in and out within a view. You can turn snap settings on and off. under Template file. click OK. do not save the changes. 19 Under Settings. 22 In the text editor.11 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. 2 In the New Project dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 14 Click in the drawing area. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click OK. you modify snap settings. 18 In the Options dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 4 In the New Project dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 21 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. In this exercise. click Modify. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. work with snapping turned off. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify snap increments. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click the Spelling tab. If prompted. click OK.

enter SM. click OK. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 10 On the Options Bar. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If it does not. snapping reverts to the system default settings. use the wheel button on your mouse. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . and enter 500 . click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 7 Under Object Snaps.6 Under Dimension Snaps. If you do not have a wheel button. clear Chain. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. such as ZO to zoom out. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 8 In the Snaps dialog. TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. While sketching. click Wall. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and move the cursor to the right. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. zoom out until it does so. For example.

Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. This is the increment that you added previously. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and delete the value 500 . enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 24 Click OK. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. If you move the cursor along the wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Do not set the wall end point. and do not save the file. 18 Enter SM. it will snap to the endpoints. the midpoint. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and the wall edges. and specify the wall endpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Move the cursor downward. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and click Wall. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and move the cursor to the right. click Modify. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.

you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. save the project file with a unique name. and object styles. When you apply a material to an element. you render a region to observe the changes. In the steps that follow. annotations. click Training Files. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Using these options. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. You create and modify materials. lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views.rvt. Finally. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. you create a new material and apply it to a model element.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Settings. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. fill patterns. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety.

7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 10 Click the Graphics tab. scale. enter Masonry . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. read-only library for render appearances.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. In the Materials dialog. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. and texture of the material. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. These details will display in rendered images. and click (Element Properties). Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. Masonry . and select Masonry . 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog.Fieldstone. and click OK.Fieldstone material. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. select Stone. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. this material provides a starting point for the new material. The properties describe the color. However. In the next exercise. and click OK. The Render Appearance Library is a local. for Class. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When a model element is loaded into a project.Fieldstone. 6 Click Replace. When you change properties of a render appearance. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 3 Click (Duplicate). It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 9 Click Apply. In the steps that follow. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. 11 Click OK.Stone.

Fieldstone. click Edit. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 16 Enter the new wall name. and click OK. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Fieldstone. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 19 On the right side of the Material field. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click Edit/New. Fieldstone on CMU. select the rear exterior wall.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the View Control Bar. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.Brick. . the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 21 Click OK three times. click This is the material that you created. and click OK. 25 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. 18 For Finish 1. select Masonry . 20 In the Materials dialog. 23 While pressing CTRL. 24 In the Type Selector. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click (Default 3D View). click in the Material field. 15 Click Duplicate. 17 For Structure. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall.

31 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the 3D view. In the following exercise. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Rendering Dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. select Low or Medium. for Setting. right-click the Design Bar. and click Rendering. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. under Quality. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. click Render. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. select Region. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. select the render region (a red rectangle). 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. When finished. The rendering process begins. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick.

click Show the model. 3 Under Pattern Type. m_Settings-in progress. select Custom. and double-click West.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Custom. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.rvt. and clear Region. Zoom into the model. such as steel. 5 Click New. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 33 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. Then click Render again. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. expand Elevations. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. choose Model. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. click Import.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. in the Rendering dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise.

under Pattern Type. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog.56. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Materials dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. and for Import scale. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. enter . 10 For Name. 21 In the Materials dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. select Model. 22 Click OK three times. 9 Under Custom. click Modify. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. for Finish 1. (Element Properties). Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. click . and click OK.pat. and click OK. click Training Files. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. click in the Material field. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the right side of the Materials field.Fieldstone material.Fieldstone. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click to select a fill pattern. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 11 Click OK. enter Fieldstone. click OK. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit/New. click 15 For Structure. select fldstn. click Edit.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand 3D Views. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. and double-click 3 Windows. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. m_Settings-in progress. click (Default 3D View). use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. adjust your zoom settings as needed.rvt.25 On the View toolbar. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. For example. 2 On the keyboard. TIP If the pattern does not display. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types.

click Modify. under Materials and Finishes. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 14 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. click in the Value column. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click 15 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice. 10 Select the arched window. click (Element Properties). click in the Value column. under Materials and Finishes. 16 On the Design Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). for Trim Exterior Material. click Edit/New. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Materials dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. and click . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.

28 Under Shading. 18 On the Model Objects tab. select Paint. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. or keywords include the word red. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. and click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog. expand Windows. (Duplicate). and click OK. and select Trim. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Trim. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. click OK. descriptions. 25 In the search field. for Class. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. type red. . click OK. 19 For Trim. 23 Click Replace. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy.red paint. for Name. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. click in the Material column. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. When you render a 3D view. enter Trim .

Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line.rvt. click New. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.31 On the View toolbar. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. for Name. is open with the 3D view active. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. (Default 3D view). 10 For Line Color. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. enter Roof Line. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . m_Settings-in progress. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.rvt. 11 For Line Pattern. select Roofs. Now that you have created a line pattern. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. select Red. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. select Roof Line. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. under Category. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.

double-click to Building. 13 In the Project Browser. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar.12 Click OK. but not the line pattern. click Model Graphics Style. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . Notice that the line color displays in this view. under 3D Views. and verify that Hidden Line is selected.

15 In the Project Browser. For Color. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. select Roofs. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Floor Plans. double-click 03 Roof. select Roofs. select 5. select Solid. select Roof Line. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Blue. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 20 Click OK. under Category. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. elevations. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Black. Plans. sections. for Visibility. 18 For Line Color. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. click Override. 19 For Line Pattern. For Pattern.

Notice the site topography and the property lines. enter Zoning Setback. 31 Click OK. select Red. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Selector.25 Click OK twice. (Line). This places the line above the topography. under Floor Plans. click New. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Line Color. For Line Pattern. under Modify Subcategories. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. and click OK. select Level: 02 Entry Level. select Double dash. click Lines. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . Click Click (Draw). 29 For Name. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select Zoning Setback. select 2. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.

This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 40 In the Project Browser. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. click (Default 3D View). click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the Model Categories tab. double-click 02 Entry Level. Expand Site.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and then clear Property Lines. expand Lines. 43 Click OK. and clear Property Lines. Modifying Annotations on page 825. select it. NOTE If Site is not selected. 36 On the View toolbar. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Zoning Setback. 39 Click OK. (Default 3D View). and clear Zoning Setback. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 44 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created.

(Undo). click Dimension. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click the default value. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. select Feet and fractional inches. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. and then click outside the second wall.rvt. 5 Under Text. To place a dimension. select Linear . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click another wall.Imperial and click OK. for Units Format. You have created a new dimension style. m_Settings-in progress. double-click 02 Entry Level.Imperial. 4 Enter the name Linear . 9 In the Type Selector.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. click Duplicate. under Floor Plans. click one wall. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK twice. For Units. 10 On the Standard toolbar. Modifying Annotations | 825 . m_Settings-in progress.rvt. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. and place a dimension on the floor plan.

21 In the Tags dialog.Number.rfa.Number as the assigned tag. click the bottom window. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 24 While pressing CTRL. scroll down to Windows. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Training Files. 27 On the west wall. Then press Delete. 28 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). click M_Window Tag . In the steps that follow. notice that the label displays 1i. In the preview image. under Category. click Tag ➤ By Category. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 16 Click Cancel.Number is now the assigned tag. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. clear Leader. 23 Click OK. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 Under Loaded Tags. Leave M_Window Tag . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 3 window tags. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type.Number. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 19 Click Load.14 On the Options Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 26 On the Options Bar. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Tags dialog.

and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.Temporary Dimensions. In the first section. 2 In the Project Units dialog. M_Window Tag . 4 In the Project Units dialog. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. for Rounding. Temporary Dimensions. 6 Click OK. and Detail Level Options on page 827. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. (Default 3D View). Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.Temporary Dimensions. you modify the temporary dimension settings. dimension values display using this setting. select 0 decimal places. and click OK. click the default value. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. you specify the project units of measurements. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 8 Under Walls. In the final section. and click OK. Unless overridden. In the second section. click the default value. Unless overridden. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the View toolbar.Number. and Detail Level Options | 827 . m_Settings-in progress. Specifying Units of Measurement. select Openings. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. for Area. click Modify. Specifying Units of Measurement. for Length. notice Window Tags appears twice. the other displays the instance value. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. select To the nearest 100. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. For Unit symbol. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. verify that Create is clear. Click OK. select Faces. dimensions use these project settings. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. select meters squared. 30 Under Leader. you modify the detail level assignments.rvt.Under Category. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. In this table. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 12 Click OK. In this exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. click .In this project.rvt. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. and expand 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. You do not select a view scale to move it. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium.

and notice that each is grouped by discipline.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. select Discipline. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. expand Sheets (all). In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. and click Apply. notice that views are grouped by phase. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 5 On the Views tab.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand each view type.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 6 In the Project Browser.

13 Select Sheet Prefix. under Sheets. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 16 Click the Views tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. click the Folders tab. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 In the Project Browser. and click New. expand each sheet set.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. and Discipline. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. when you create a new project. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. and click Open. If you want to save this file. and expand both Architectural and Structural. You can choose from several templates. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Proceed to the next lesson. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Training Files. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. Whenever you create a new project or template. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. click Browse. Creating an Office Template on page 831. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. under Views. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and view names. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In the lesson that follows. expand Complete. 2 Under Template file. For example. and click OK. dimensions styles. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. enter a unique file name. When you create new projects. you create an office template. the same rules apply. View Type (Family and Type). The template selection may vary depending on your installation.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you select the starting point for your office template. In that case.rte template. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. expand 3D Views. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. In this lesson. levels. and open Metric\Templates. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Creating an Office Template | 831 . and click OK.

If you want to use a template other than the default. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. for Create new. 6 Click OK. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and double-click North. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. When you create the material. If you have additional projects open. you modify the project settings for your new template. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. in the drawing area. and click OK. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Under Create new. 7 In the Project Browser. weights. 9 In the Project Browser. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. For example. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. close them. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. select Project. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can select it now. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 13 Select the default template. select Project template.5 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. 12 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 14 Click Open. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules.

When you create or modify a material. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. or refer to the online help. Observe the materials that are already defined. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. and move model patterns. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. or refer to the online help. you can set line weights. Modifying System Settings on page 803.During this exercise. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 13 If necessary. see a preview of the rendered material. TIP For more information about creating new materials. If you change render appearance properties. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. and change render appearance properties. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. You can align. see the previous lesson. and imported objects. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. or modify existing patterns. line patterns. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. and materials for model objects. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. line colors. and scroll through the list of categories. In the Object Styles dialog. rotate. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. create and modify them as needed. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . you can specify its appearance in rendered images. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. 4 Click Replace. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. create new subcategories. including color. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. specific modifications are not dictated. texture. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. the changes are saved as part of the project template. For more information. 9 Click OK when finished. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. For more details on modifying these settings. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 2 Scroll down the materials list. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and similar attributes. annotation objects. You do this by defining the render appearance. transparency.

25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. create new line subcategories. or line pattern as needed. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. select it. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. and create new subcategories as needed. and dimensions. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 19 If necessary. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. click Duplicate. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 18 For existing line categories. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and click Edit. You can add and delete view scales. 29 Click OK. and specify the properties. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. modify the line weight.15 Modify categories. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. line color. 20 Click OK. select it from this list. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. such as section lines and dimension lines. name the style. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 34 Click OK. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. To see the details of a particular style. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 32 To modify a line pattern. tags.

55 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. click Format. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. name the style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. For example. Volume. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 46 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 60 Under Walls. TIP In the drawing area. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 58 Click OK. 57 Specify the Slope option. and specify the properties. and click OK. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. click Load. Linear. 50 To load new annotation tags. click Duplicate. when you add a door with the tag option selected. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 62 Click OK. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 53 For Length. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. select it from this list. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. and Angle settings. and radial dimensions are modified separately. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. angular. In the Tags dialog. and choose a decimal symbol. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.40 Click OK.

See Setting up If necessary. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. To move the view scales. 71 Delete. Although these settings can be saved within a template. click the Views tab. create new browser organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 69 If necessary. In a typical project. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. 68 Delete. In such a case. For example. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. or edit existing organization types. Each command is available on the Settings menu. However. create new browser organization types. and move view scales as needed. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Using the arrows between the columns. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 73 Click OK. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 65 Click OK. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . or edit existing organization types. You can find additional information in Help. or Fine. click the arrows between columns. Medium. rename. 70 Click the Sheets tab. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 72 If necessary. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. and make modifications in each area as necessary. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 64 Review the table. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. The detail level is based on view scale. Use the table below as a checklist. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. rename. When you create a new view.

Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. there are some important thoughts to consider. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. do so before starting this exercise. Although this is possible. In addition. and the poche depth. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can set the default contour line interval. and electrical fixtures. Depending on the intended use of this template. you could load detail components. click Door. the section cut material. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. you do both. If necessary. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. if you load every available window type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. In the steps that follow. You can load any family or group into a template. title blocks. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . modify. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. For example. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. you can set up the phases. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. However. furniture. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. notice the list of doors already loaded. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. 2 In the Type Selector. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. or add to this selection. you may want to delete. or electrical fixtures. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. or use the Project Browser. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. For example. If this selection is satisfactory. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. Although the options are endless. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. phase filters. you can move onto the next component type.

Navigate to the directory containing the door type. and click Open. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Select it. and click OK. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. create. click Edit/New.3 To modify. Make modifications. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. create. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Enter a name. and click OK. Modify type properties. In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. expand Families. click Bar. or load a new door type. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Click Duplicate. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that each family category is listed. In the Element Properties dialog. or modify a door. click Load. click Edit/New.

The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. In addition. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance.) 10 Expand the title block. create. This title block is currently part of the template. and select the title block type. Discipline. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. In addition. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. 13 Click OK. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. (Element Properties). (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. you created new projects using different templates. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Detail Level. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . 11 On the Options Bar. click 12 Click Preview. right-click the component. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. To load a title block. and click Delete. View Range. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. To do so. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. In this exercise. click Load. load. you create the views required for your template.

6 Click OK. under Floor Plans. After applying the template. you will first modify view templates. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 18 If you modified any other view templates. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Every time a new plan view is created.settings of categories and subcategories. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. click Apply. select Site Plan. double-click South. and click OK. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 3 Specify each value according to your needs. the view is not linked to the template in any way. In this exercise. click Apply. 2 Under Names. under Elevations. and click OK. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. and then click OK. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. open the view from the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. select Architectural Plan. 4 If necessary. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. you can apply a view template to any view. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. under Floor Plans. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. and apply the appropriate template. 12 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click Level 2. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. and double-click Level 1. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 11 Click Apply. At any time. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 15 In the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. In addition.

and click Properties. If it does not display. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. 30 In the Project Browser. By default. right-click the ViewCube. or an edge of the ViewCube. or delete them as needed. under 3D Views. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. in the Project Browser. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click Orient to a Direction. duplicate. 27 Create additional levels as needed. and click Rename. or delete this view. 31 Rename the 3D View. in the shortcut menu. right-click the ViewCube. right-click Level 1. 22 In the Project Browser. a face. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . click Schedule/Quantities. use the ViewCube. 23 To add more levels to the template. To orient the 3D view to a direction. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. If you want to modify view properties. notice that you have the option to rename. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. click 29 In the Project Browser. ceiling plans. If prompted. (Default 3D View). Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To orient the 3D view to another view. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. Black level heads have no associated views. Blue level heads have associated plan views.Notice the level names. right-click the view name. on the View toolbar. and elevations. expand 3D Views. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. review the existing floor plans. review the floor plans. and click Save View. under Floor Plans. duplicate. under Floor Plans. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. click Level. enter a view name. right-click the ViewCube. 24 On the Options Bar. and select the desired direction. select Make Plan View. Rename. and. right-click {3D}. and select the desired view. click Orient to View. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. in the Project Browser. select one. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. and click Add View to Sheet. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. modify settings as needed. 42 Create new sheets as needed. on the View tab of the Design Bar. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. To do so. and click Rename. select and order required fields. click Sheet. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. and click OK. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Appearance tab. Select a view.txt for AutoCAD. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Filter tab. select the category type. You are prompted to select a title block. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. and click OK. assign filters. select the default title block. or exportlayersdgn. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and click OK. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. click Add View. After the sheet is created. select the title block and delete it. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and modify their properties accordingly. modify settings as needed. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. 37 Click OK.txt for MicroStation).You can add schedules to a template. When you import a DWG or DXF file. To later add a title block to a sheet. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. You can still add views to the sheet. expand Sheets (all). Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Right-click the sheet name. modify settings as needed. On the Formatting tab. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. 40 To add views to the sheet. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.

and related multi-category tags and schedules. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. For example. name the file. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. doors. and click Save. name the file. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. therefore. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. When you import a DWG or DXF file. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. click Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. 5 For each category. These settings are retained within the project template. 2 For each category. and so on. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and click Save.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. You can save these mappings to a text file. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. project parameters. select Save As. When you create a multi-category schedule. name the file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . and click Save. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). and they become the set mappings for the project. 9 Click Save As. 8 In the dialog. for example. and so on. windows. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Using shared parameters. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. When scheduling. They cannot be shared with other projects. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved.

26 Click OK. 11 For each parameter group. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 2 Click Create. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 23 Add project parameters as needed. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. click Add. under Groups. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. click New. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 6 Create as many groups as needed. enter a parameter name. For each parameter group. you may want to save the file to a network location. 9 Name the parameter. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. and select Shared Parameter. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 17 Under Discipline. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. If a file already exists. because each office has a unique set of needs. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. select Project parameter. 3 Name and save the file. select a parameter discipline type. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 19 Under Group parameter under. and click OK. add required parameters. and choose a shared parameter. select a group to add parameters to. 22 Click OK. 8 Under Parameters. click New. 21 Under Categories. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 24 To add a shared project parameter. project parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 14 Click Add. select a parameter value type. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Under Parameter Data. If this template will be used by multiple team members. and specify its discipline and type. you can create a list of parameters. 10 Click OK. 25 Click Select.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 5 Enter the group name.

make minor modifications if necessary. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. or refer to the online help. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. you need only select a setting. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. By going first to the Print command. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. In this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . click Schedule/Quantities. you create named print settings. and click OK. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. you can set options such as sheet sizes. and click Open. 34 For Category. and the percent of actual size. click OK. save the file as a template. For each printer. 5 Click Save As. and make it your default template file. you can load them into the template. Click OK. 6 In the New dialog. and print. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 3 Under Settings. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. select Multi-Category. 2 Under Printer. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 32 Navigate to the directory. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. click Setup. 35 For Name. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. enter a name for the schedule. For information on creating multi-category tags. paper placement. for Name. select the tag. By creating named settings within the template. The tag is now part of the template. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 28 Click OK. 4 Modify the printer settings.

and create new settings for this printer. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. and click Open. Your template is complete. If you have a project. 18 Click Browse. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 11 Click Close when finished. and saved them to a template. modify the printer settings. and click Save. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 23 For Default template file. In addition. 22 Click the File Locations tab. Create additional settings as needed. click Setup. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. select a different printer. The only remaining task is to save it. If you need to share this file with others. you modified settings. 19 Select the template. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. By investing the time to individualize your template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 Name the template. and click OK. select it. select Template Files (*. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. click Browse. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 20 Click OK. click Save as. you ensure that office standards are maintained. save it in a network location. 9 In the Print dialog. In this lesson.rte). 25 Click OK. 14 Under Save as type. loaded components. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. In addition. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. You can also set this template as your default template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. enter a new name for the printer. 24 Navigate to the template location.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful